C1.Web.UI.Controls.3
Represents a menu in an ASP.NET Web page.
IC1MenuItemCollectionOwner interface.
Menu items collection
Menu item owner.
C1Menu constructor.
C1Menu constructor.
Handles the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Determines whether the server control contains child controls. If it does not, it creates child controls.
CreateChildControls override.
DataBind override.
EnsureDataBound override.
Creates the items from data source.
The enumerable.
Rises ItemClick event.
A C1MenuEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Rises ItemPropertyChanged event.
A C1ItemPropertyChangedEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Find menu item by value (Recursive method).
Menu item value.
C1MenuItem.
Create child controls from menu items.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets definitions what will be used by control only at run-time.
Primarily this method is used by control developers. Note, style sheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
OnPreRender override.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets the name of the visual style CSS class.
AddAttributesToRender override
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the design time css for the control
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Saves the control layout properties to the XML file.
Path to the file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the XML file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
LoadViewState
SaveViewState
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
Notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Process an event
raised when a form is posted to the server.
A System.String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to
the event handler.
GetScriptDescriptors override.
List with script descriptors.
GetScriptReferences override.
List with script references.
Override FindControl method.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether this instance is dirty.
true if this instance is dirty; otherwise, false.
The ID of a control that represents the data source from which the data-bound control retrieves its data. The default is System.String.Empty.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not
children will flow to the right side of the control.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not child menu items will be checkable.
If true then css class "C1CheckableSupport" will be added to scroll container element.
Gets or sets if menu item is Enabled.
Gets or sets if menu is Visible.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
Returns true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets tooltip text what will be displayed when mouse is over item.
Determines whether or not submenu position will be adjusted to fit in window bounds.
Default value is false.
Gets a C1MenuItemCollection object that includes the child menu items in the C1Menu control.
Owner of the menu.
Always returns null.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets a collection of C1MenuItemBinding objects that define the relationship between a data item and the menu item it is binding to.
Fires when an item is clicked.
Fires when the menu item's property changed.
Fires on client side when menu item is focused.
Fires on client side when menu item looses focus.
Fires on client side when mouse is over menu item.
Fires on client side when mouse becomes out of a menu item.
Fires on client side when mouse is down on menu item.
Fires on client side when menu item is clicked.
Fires on client side when menu item is checked.
Fires on client side when menu item is unchecked.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
Gets or sets the direction in which to render the C1Menu control.
Determines if sub menu should open on mouse click event instead of mouse over.
Expand Animation effect.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Expand delay in milliseconds before sub menu start popup.
Default value is 100.
Specifies the transition for expand animation.
Specifies the transition for collapse animation.
Collapse Animation effect.
Collapse Animation duration in milliseconds.
Collapse delay in milliseconds before sub menu starts hiding. Default value is 100.
Specifies whether the menu is context.
ID of the HTML element which will expose the Context Menu when ContextMenu property is true.
Default value is an empty string.The Value of the document specifies the context menu that will be
shown for the document.
Menu will be shown when mouse is over element given by this property.
Path to visual styles.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
"ArcticFox" is default value.
Gets the scroll setting for the menu.
If specified, this template will be applied for all menu items that does not have other defined templates.
If specified, this template will be applied for all menu items instead of top level menu items.
If specified, this template will be applied for top level menu items.
Gets the System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriterTag value that corresponds to this Web
server control. This property is used primarily by control developers.
Instance of this class wraps menu items to the group.
Constructor.
Control what owns C1MenuGroupPanel.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not
children will flow to the right side of the control.
Represents Menu Item.
Base abstract class for all menu item types.
Default constructor of the class.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified
System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriterTag. This method is used primarily by control
developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render
HTML content on the client.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders the template container.
The writer.
Renders the item contents.
The writer.
Outputs the content of a server control's children to a provided object, which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The object that receives the rendered content.
Indicates if this menu item is first in parent owner Items collection.
This method returns true when menu item is first.
Indicates if this menu item is last in parent owner Items collection.
This method returns true when menu item is last.
Determines the list item CSS classes.
string with space separated CSS classes that will be placed on LI tag.
Loads the properties from JSON object that received from client.
The JSON data.
Returns true if control state changed.
CreateChildControls override.
fires after C1MenuItem's collection changed.
sender
C1ToolBarItemCollectionChangedEventArgs
Returns zero-based Level of current item.
Creates new instance of NestedGroup and assigns it to current menu item.
This method preliminary used by control developers.
Note, menu item does not renders created submenu automatically.
Sub menu must be rendered outside of menu item markup but inside Top level menu.
Override FindControl method.
Gets or Sets the StaticKey for C1MenuItem.
this property should be hidden.
Gets or Sets CssClass of this item.
Gets a value that indicates whether this item is separator.
Gets a value that indicates whether this item is header.
Gets a value that indicates whether this item is group.
Gets whether the item is templated.
Gets or sets the template container.
The template container.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
This means that menu item html markup will be not rendered into destination page.
true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets if menu item is Visible.
This means that menu item html markup will be actually rendered into destination page but display style will be none.
Gets the C1Menu control.
Gets or sets the template that will be used for this menu item.
Gets index of the menu item within parent owner.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Menu item is enabled.
Gets or sets the value for the menu item.
Returns zero-based Level of current item.
Gets the scroll settings for the menu item.
Gets the first sibling item.
The first sibling item.
Gets the last sibling item.
The last sibling item.
Gets the next sibling item.
The next sibling item.
Gets the previous sibling item.
The previous sibling.
Gets or sets the programmatic identifier assigned to the server control.
The programmatic identifier assigned to the control.
Gets the server control identifier generated by ASP.NET.
The server control identifier generated by ASP.NET.
Gets a C1MenuItemCollection object that includes the submenu items of the current menu item.
Gets the owner object which contains the item.
It might be an instance of the C1Menu class or the C1MenuItem
class depending on the current hierarchy level.
Marker for items types that supports nested groups
Gets or sets CSS class that will be placed on nested group container element that used as group or sub-menu container.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not child menu items will be checkable.
If true then CSS class "C1CheckableSupport" will be added to scroll container element.
Sub-menu or nested group orientation.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group width in pixels.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group height in pixels.
Constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The text.
Renders the item contents.
The writer.
Renders the text node.
The writer.
Determines the list item CSS classes.
string with space separated CSS classes that will be placed on LI tag.
this property should be hidden.
Expand Animation effect.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Expand delay in milliseconds before the sub menu begins to popup. Default value is 0.
Specifies the transition for expand animation.
Specifies the transition for collapse animation.
Collapse Animation effect.
Collapse Animation duration in milliseconds.
Collapse delay in milliseconds before sub menu starts hiding. Default value is 100.
Gets or sets css class that will be placed on nested group container element that used as group or sub-menu container.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not child menu items will be checkable.
If true then css class "C1CheckableSupport" will be added to scroll container element.
Sub-menu or nested group orientation.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group width in pixels.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group height in pixels.
Gets or sets access key for menu item. If user presses the specified keyboard shortcut then focus moves on this menu item. If menu item locates in sub menu then the path hierarchy of the submenus will be opened to display the menu item.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the C1MenuItem
is checked.
Set this property to true to indicate a checked state; otherwise, false. The default is false.
Gets or sets the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked in the item. Default value is empty string.
Gets or sets the target window or frame in which to display the Web page content associated with a menu item when the menu item is clicked or the enter key is pressed.
The default value is an empty string.
Gets or sets the text caption for the menu item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that is displayed next to the text in the menu item.
Url path to the image that will be displayed for the disabled item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that is displayed when you mouse over the menu item.
Gets or sets which side, left or right, the image will be rendered from the menu item.
Gets or sets the fixed width of the image.
The width of the image.
Gets or sets the fixed height of the image.
The height of the image.
Gets or sets the ToolTip text for the menu item when the mouse is over it.
Menu item binding class.
Creates new instance of the C1MenuItemBinding class.
Creates new instance of the C1MenuItemBinding class.
Data member to bind a menu item.
Clone this object.
ToString override.
string.
Gets or sets the data member to bind a menu item.
Gets or sets the menu depth to which the C1MenuItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the display format for the Text of a C1MenuItem to which the C1MenuItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source that indicates C1MenuItemHeader item.
The group field.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source that indicates C1MenuItemSeparator item.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source that indicates C1MenuItemGroup item.
The group field.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Text property of a C1MenuItem object to which the C1MenuItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Value property of a C1MenuItem object to which the C1MenuItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the NavigateUrl property of a C1MenuItem object to which the C1MenuItemBinding object is applied.
Represents a collection of C1MenuItemBinding objects that are used by data-bound C1Menu control.
Represents a collection of C1MenuItemBase objects that are used by Items property.
Constructor.
Removes all items from collection.
Adds new menu item to the end of the list.
Insert item to specific position into the collection.
Posicion, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Removes item from list.
Removes item from list by index.
Events of C1MenuItemCollection Change.
Occurs after collection was changed.
Occurs before collection was changed.
Gets value that indicates if the object is empty or not.
If object is empty than it will be skipped during the serialization process.
Represents a container that holds the contents of a
templated menu item in a C1Menu control.
Initializes a new instance of the C1MenuItemTemplateContainer class
using the specified menu item index and menu item.
Sends server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object,
which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
OnBubbleEvent override.
Gets or sets the menu item associated with the container.
Gets the index of the menu item associated with the container.
Serializes C1Menu Control.
Constructor.
Overriden.
Overriden.
C1ItemPropertyChangedEventArgs is used by the ItemPropertyChanged event.
An Item in the control which raised an event.
Property name.
New value of the property.
C1MenuItemCollectionChangedEventArgs is used for the C1MenuItemCollectionChange event.
constructor of the C1MenuItemCollectionChangedEventArgs
indicate the item which to be add or remove from the C1ToolBarItemCollection.
indicate the ChangeStatus of the C1ToolBarItemCollection.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the PropertyChanged event.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the items.
The source of the event
C1MenuEventArgs object that contains the event data
C1MenuEventArgs is used by the ItemClick event.
Constructor.
Menu item that raised the event.
Constructor.
Menu item that raised the event.
Object that raised the event.
A System.Web.UI.WebControls.CommandEventArgs that contains the event data.
Gets the Object that raised the event.
Gets the menu item that raised the event.
Specifies change status.
add.
remove.
Provides a unified way of converting string to HeaderType type.
Can convert from type.
Convert string to HeaderType type.
Converts HeaderType to string.
Convert string to HeaderType.
A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
Menu orientation.
Auto.
Vertical orientation.
Horizontal orientation.
Type of the Header item tag.
H1 tag.
H2 tag.
H3 tag.
H4 tag.
H5 tag.
H6 tag.
Determines left or right side where image will be rendered.
Flow left.
Flow right.
Represents the control that provides the functionality to create and manage the tree structures.
Used for establish relationshid between the nodes collection
and its owner.
Collection that contains nodes.
Owner of collection.
Default Constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
AddAttributesToRender override
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders elements. Renders hiden element used be the control for serialization.
Renders the content elements of .
Binds a data source to the invoked tree view and all its nodes.
CreateChildControls override.
Binds a data source to the invoked tree view and all its nodes.
Calls the DataBind() method for all the sub controls.
Creates new instance of the class.
OnPreRender override.
Performs registration in ScriptManager and register treeview for PostBack.
Relate all nodes to its treeview
Searches node through the collection by the NavigateUrl.
Recursive searching is used until node is found.
First node that match the searched text.
Searches node through the collection by the Text.
Recursive searching is used until node is found.
First node that match the searched text.
Searches node through the collection by the Value.
Recursive searching is used until node is found.
node property
First node that match the searched text.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
GetScriptDescriptors override.
GetScriptReferences override.
Returns references to script resources used by the in the C1TreeView control.
Returns references to script resources used by the Palomino framework.
Saves the changes to a server control's view state to an Object.
The Object that contains the view state changes.
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Identify the acction to take as response to the client request
Recovers the data that will be used to recreate some part of treeview.
Create a part of treeview requested by the client.
LoadPostData.
OnLoad override.
At this point tree view raise all its events.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
OnInit override.
Used to manipulate statically created nodes.
Override FindControl method.
tree view's data bindings.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets the System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriterTag value that corresponds to this Web
server control. This property is used primarily by control developers.
Returns all visual styles that have been embedded with the control.
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
VisualStyle name.
Occurs on the server after the node has been dropped.
Occurs on the server after the node is expanded.
Occurs on the server after the node is collapsed.
Occurs on the server if a node in the TreeView control changes its check status.
Occurs on the server if a node in the TreeView control has been selected.
Occurs on the server if a node in the TreeView control has been clicked.
Occurs on the server when a node's Text property is changed.
Occurs after a node is data bound.
Gets a value indicating whether treeview is enabled or disabled.
If treeview is disabled, click and select operations are also disabled.
If specified, the OnClientNodeCheckChanged client-side event handler is called after the node check status has been changed.(If Checkboxes are enabled)
If specified, the OnClientNodeTextChanged client-side event handler is called after a node's text has been edited.
If specified, the OnClientNodeExpanded client-side event handler is called after the node has been expanded.
If specified, the OnClientNodeCollapsed client-side event handler is called after the node has been collapsed.
If specified, the OnClientNodeClicked client-side event handler is called after the node has been clicked.
If specified, the OnClientNodeSelection client-side event handler is called after the node has been selected.
If specified, the OnClientNodeMouseOver client-side event handler is called if the user moves the mouse pointer over of the node.
If specified, the OnClientNodeMouseOut client-side event handler is called if the user moves the mouse pointer out of the node.
If specified, the OnClientNodeDragStarted client-side event handler is called before drag is started.
If specified, the OnClientNodeDragging client-side event handler is called if the user moves the mouse while dragging the node.
If specified, the OnClientNodeDropped client-side event handler is called before the node has been dropped by user.
Gets a object that contains the root nodes of the current control.
There is no such owner for .
Gets or sets the value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
Gets or sets the value that indicates whether or not Loads on demand is enabled.
Gets or sets the value that indicates DataBind start level.
If value is 0, only root nodes will be bounded on start. For the value equals to 1, root nodes and first level nodes will be bounded.
Default value -1 indicates that property will be ignored.
Gets or sets the value that indicates the level for expantion.
For 0,only root nodes will be expanded.
For 1,root nodes and its sub nodes will be expanded etc.
For -1,or for the value that separate last level all nodes will be expanded.
Default value is -2, does not affect.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether lines connecting child nodes to parent nodes are displayed.
Allow nodes to be expanded or collapsed.
Allow nodes to use hover for Expand or Collapse elements.
Allow sub nodes to be checked on parent node check.
Allow to TreeView nodes to perform drag and drop.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
If this option is set to true, expanded node will be collapsed if other node is expanded.
Allow the check box to be shown on the nodes.
Allow TriState of CheckBox
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
Returns true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets if toolbar is Visible.
Allow nodes to be sorted at run time.
Allow nodes to be edited at run time.
This property indicates if node will get focus if mouse pointer is over it.
If specified, this template will be applied for all nodes that does not have other defined templates.
PostBack event reference of client side.
Gets the SelectedNodes of C1TreeView.
Gets the CheckedNodes of C1TreeView.
Gets or sets the animation effect when the node is expanded.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Expand delay in milliseconds before child nodes expand.
Default value is 0.
Specifies the transition for expand animation.
Collapse Animation effect.
Collapse Animation duration in milliseconds.
Collapse delay in milliseconds before child nodes collapse.
Default value is 100.
Specifies the transition for collapse animation.
Represents a node in the control.
The constructor of the .
Override FindControl method.
Determines if NavigateUrl property match value of SearchedUrl.
Renders .
Override CreateChildControls method.
AddAttributesToRender override
Vinculate current node with respective owner and treefview.
Renders the content elements of .
Renders nodes that has been added to the child nodes collection .
Renders the node elements.
The writer.
Renders nodes that has been added to child nodes collection .
OnPreRender override.
Apply ExpandDepth property to current node.
Gets or Sets CssClass of the node.
Gets reference to TreeView object.
Index of the C1TreeViewNode.
Gets a that contains the first-level child nodes of the current node.
Gets the server control identifier.
The owner of to wich this node belongs to.
Gets or sets the template that will be used for the specified C1TreeViewNodes.
Gets value that indicates if node will be initialized as an template.
Gets or sets the text displayed for this node.
Gets or sets the value of this node.
Gets or sets the URL to navigate to when the node is clicked. The default value is an empty string.
Gets a value indicating whether node is enabled or disabled.
If node is disabled, click and select operations are also disabled.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
This means that treeview node html markup will be not rendered into destination page.
true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets if menu item is Visible.
This means that menu item html markup will be actually rendered into destination page but display style will be none.
Gets a value that indicates whether the node is expanded.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether node is selected or not.
Gets a value that indicates treeview node's check state.
Gets a value that indicates whether node is checked or not.
Gets or sets the path to the image to display for the node when it is expanded.
If CollapsedImageUrl or ExpandedImageUrl are not specified, then the ImageUrl property is used instead.
Gets or sets the path to the image to display for the node when it is collapsed.
If CollapsedImageUrl or ExpandedImageUrl are not specified, then the ImageUrl property is used instead.
Gets or sets the path to the image to display for the node.
If CollapsedImageUrl and ExpandedImageUrl are specified ImageUrl property is not used.
Gets the value that indicates if current node has an image.
Gets value that indicates if this node has child nodes which can be initialized later.
This property only used if treeview is bounded to data source and callbacks are enabled.
Gets value that can be used for tracking original position inside of data source.
This property only used if treeview is bounded to data source and callbacks are enabled.
Gets zero-based Level of current node.
StaticKey.
Defines the relationship between a data item and the node it is binding to in a control.
Implicit constructor for the .
Explicit constructor for the .
Clone this object.
ToString override.
Gets or sets the value to match against a . Type property for a data item to determine whether to apply the tree node binding.
Gets or sets the node depth at which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the display format
for the text of the node to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ImageUrl property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the CollapsedImageUrl property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ExpandedImageUrl property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the NavigateUrl property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Text property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Value property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Expanded property of a object to which the object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Enabled property of a object to which the object is applied.
Represents a collection of objects in the control.
Adds the binding to the collection.
Determines whether the specified object is in the collection.
Copies the elements collection
to an array, starting at a particular array index.
Gets the index of binding.
Inserts binding into the collection.
Removes binding from the collection.
Removes binding from the collection from specific index.
OnClear override.
OnRemoveComplete override.
OnValidate override.
CreateKnownType override.
SetDirtyObject override.
GetKnownTypes override.
Gets or sets the object at the specified index in the object.
Represents the structure that manages the nodes.
Explicit constructor for .
Checks nodes contained by the collection.
Adds node to the collection.
node to add
Inserts node to the collection.
collection index
node to insert
Removes node from the collection.
node to remove
Searches node through the collection by the Value.
node property
First node that match the searched text.
Searches node through the collection by the Text.
First node that match the searched text.
Searches node through the collection by id.
node id
Represent serializer used by tree view.
Constructor
Overriden.
Overriden.
Specifies check state.
Checked.
Indeterminate
UnChecked
Contains event data for all events raised by the control.
Explicit constructor for
A that represents the current node when the event is raised.
node associated to the event data.
Provides data for the NodeDropped event of the class.
Explicit constructor for
A that represents the current node when the event is raised.
A value that indicates whether the dropped event has been managed from the outside.
A value that indicates whether the copy method of node has been used to perform the drop.
Gets a value that indicates whether the dropped event has been managed from the outside.
Gets a value that indicates whether the copy method of node has been used to perform the drop.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the nodes.
The source of the event.
object that contains the event data.
C1NavPanel content container control.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Constructor.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Outlook UI menu control.
MenuItem for "Add/Remove additional buttons" menu.
Constructor.
Determines whether the server control contains child controls. If it does not, it creates child controls.
Renders the design time css for the control
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Sends server control content to a provided HtmlTextWriter object, which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Create a child controls collection using specified items.
C1NavPanel resizer control.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Constructor.
Parent C1Accordion.
AddAttributesToRender override.
RenderContents override.
Outlook user interface settings.
Returns a String that represents the current Object.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the resize holder will be visible.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the hidden topics bar will be visible.
Sets or retrieves a value indicating whether options menu will be shown at right side of the hidden topics bar.
Resize holder size in pixels.
Hidden topics bar size in pixels.
C1Accordion is a web control that allows you to provide multiple panes and
display them one at a time.
Whether or not the control has been initialized
C1Accordion default constructor. Initializes a new instance of the C1Accordion class.
Handles the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Overrides the method CreateChildControls in order to create the child controls for C1Accordion.
This method overrides the generic DataBind method to bind the related data to the control.
This method overrides the EnsureDataBound method in order to make sure that sub controls are also bound.
Creates a child controls collection using the collection.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
Indicates if data binding is used to create the collection.
Called when selected pane is changed.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheet definitions that will be used by the control only at design time.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
Note that the style sheet styles.css from the embedded visual styles will be included automatically by the visual style mechanism.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheet definitions that will be used by the control only at run-time.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
Note that the style sheet styles.css from the embedded visual styles will be included automatically by the visual style mechanism.
Raises the PreRender event.
Provides additional processing during the pre-render phase of the control and invokes the OnPreRender method of its base class in order to raise the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets CSS class selector for content side.
CSS class selector for content side.
Gets CSS class selector for the accordion including visual style and control state information.
CSS class selector for the accordion control.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified . This method is used primarily by control developers.
An that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Determines whether the server control contains child controls. If it does
not, it creates child controls.
Implements the internal logic to determine whether the server control contains child controls and to create child controls.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
This method is called immediately before Render method.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
This method is called immediately after Render method.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
Calculates the fill size for expanded panes.
This method is primarily used by control developers.
Calculated headers size.
Collection of expanded panes.
Fill Size for expanded pane.
Sends server control content to a provided HtmlTextWriter object, which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
Creates the pane control that can be added to Panes collection.
Retrieves data from the associated data source.
Binds data from the data source to the control.
The IEnumerable list of data returned from a PerformSelect method call.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
True if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, False.
Notifies the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Process an event
raised when a form is posted to the server.
A System.String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to
the event handler.
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved with the method.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves any state that was modified after the method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's property.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
A collection of ScriptDescriptor instances.
Registers the script references for the control.
A collection of ScriptReference instances with the required client-script blocks.
Empty out the child Pane's collection
Recreates child controls.
Returns a resolved URL that is suitable for use by the client.
A URL relative to the current page.
A System.String containing the resolved URL.
Gets the resource path of the CSS stylesheet.
The resource path of the embedded CSS stylesheet.
Gets the Top Selector name for the CSS Class.
The root CSS class name used by the control.
Gets the full visual style CSS class name with the control name's prefix.
The visual style CSS class name.
Gets or sets the ID of the control from which the data-bound control retrieves its list of data items.
The ID of a control that represents the data source from which the data-bound control retrieves its data.
Gets or sets the name of the list of data that the data-bound control binds to, in cases where the data source contains more than one distinct list of data items.
The name of the specific list of data that the data-bound control binds to, if more than one list is supplied by a data source control. The default value is .
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not children will flow to the right side of the control.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
Default header size in pixels.
Gets or sets the direction in which the content are of the control expands.
Collection of child panes in the accordion.
Gets list of panes that will be rendered into page.
The panes list.
Gets or sets the index of the pane to be displayed.
Determines whether clicking the header will close the currently opened pane (leaving all the accordion's panes closed).
Default value is True.
Gets or sets the selected pane in the accordion.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether or not we suppress the client-side click handlers of any elements in the header sections.
Default value is False.
Determines how the width or height of the accordion control will be controlled. Default value is None. If it is set to None, then the accordion can increase as large or as small as necessary to fit the pane's information. If it is set to Fill then it will always be equal to its height or width for horizontal orientation.
Gets or sets the width of the accordion.
Gets or sets the height of the accordion.
Returns string array with embedded visual styles names.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
"ArcticFox" is default value.
Gets or sets the enabled property used by the control.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets the text displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the Web server control.
The text displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the Web server control. The default is .
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
Animation duration in milliseconds.
Default value is 500.
Specifies the transition effect when the content area of the control expands.
Specifies the transition for collapse animation.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web
server control.
This property is used primarily by control developers.
Raised when the selected pane changes.
Handler name of the client SelectedPaneChanged event.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the panes header.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the panes content.
Determines the type or section of the C1AccordionPane.
Header section of the Pane
Content section of the Pane
Provides several options for resizing an Accordion control.
Keeps the size of the C1Accordion control from being restricted.
The Accordian's size will remain the same as its Height property (or Width property for horizontal orienation).
The size of the panel's content area will be increased or decreased to fit the size of its fixed Height property.
A C1AccordionPane control is an expandable pane containing a header, or title,
for the information to be displayed in its accordion, or viewing area.
C1Expander panel web control.
Base implementation for all controls that contain single content and have
a header.
JsonSerializableHelper.
HeaderTemplate.
ContentTemplate.
Create ContentPanel.
Create HeaderPanel.
C1HeaderContentControl constructor.
Constructor that receive header text as parameter.
Text that will be rendered into header panel.
Verifies the license.
The key.
Called before control initialization.
Determines whether the server control contains child controls. If it does not, it creates child controls.
Add created child controls to Page.
AddAttributesToRender override.
Raises the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Render override.
RenderChildren override.
RenderContents override.
Get script descriptors.
Get script references.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets definitions what will be used by control only at run-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, style sheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
LoadPostData.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
RaisePostBackEvent.
When implemented by a class, loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves any state that was modified after the method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's property.
Internal LoadPostData.
Internal RaisePostbackServerEvents.
DetermineControlWidth.
DetermineControlHeight.
DetermineContentPanelWidth.
DetermineHeaderPanelWidth.
Determine HeaderPanel BorderBox.
Determine ContentPanel BorderBox.
Determine IsExpanded.
Gets css class selector for content side.
Css class selector for content side.
Gets css class selector for content side.
Determine content side.
Determine Orientation.
Get top selector css class name.
GetVisualStyleCssClassName.
Returns css class for header panel.
Returns css class for content panel.
ParseBool.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
Gets or sets URL to the content of the panel.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not
children will flow to the right side of the control.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
"ArcticFox" is default value.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
Returns true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
True if the control is visible on the page; otherwise False.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is enabled.
true if control is enabled; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets the scroll bar settings for content section.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether or not we suppress the client-side click handlers of any elements in the header sections.
Default value is false.
Header size in pixels.
Control width.
Control height.
Gets the control that is used as the header panel.
Gets the control that is used as the content panel.
Gets the header panel client ID for the C1HeaderContentControl.
Gets the content panel client ID for the C1HeaderContentControl.
Gets or sets the header template used to display the content of the control's header.
Gets or sets the content of a ContentControl.
Controls collection.
Gets a value that indicates whether the server control is saving changes to its view state.
true if the control is marked to save its state; otherwise, false.
Constructor.
Constructor that receive header text as parameter.
Text that will be rendered into header panel.
Get script descriptors.
Get script references.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets definitions what will be used by control only at run-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, style sheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Internal LoadPostData.
Internal RaisePostbackServerEvents.
Determine IsExpanded.
DetermineContentSide.
DetermineOrientation.
GetTopSelectorCssClassName.
GetVisualStyleCssClassName.
Create ContentPanel.
Create HeaderPanel.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
AutoPostBack Event Reference. Empty string if AutoPostBack property is false.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the panel is in an expanded state.
Default value is true.
Specifies the general layout orientation of the panel.
Expand Animation effect.
Default value is None.
Collapse Animation effect.
Collapse Animation duration in milliseconds.
Default value is 500 milliseconds.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Default value is 500 milliseconds.
Specifies the transition for expand animation.
Specifies the transition for collapse animation.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Specifies the accordion pane header's CSS selectors.
Initializes a new instance of the C1AccordionPane class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1AccordionPane class.
This constructor preliminary used by controls developers.
Use this constructor if you need reference to parent C1Accordion control inside overridden
methods when pane is not yet added to C1Accordion's Panes collection.
Note, this constructor will not add newly created C1AccordionPane into C1Accordion's Panes collection automatically.
So, developer need to do it manually.
Parent instance.
Initializes a new instance of the C1AccordionPane class.
Text that will be rendered into header panel.
Calculates the control's width in pixels.
The current control's width based on whether the control is expanded or not.
Calculates the control's height in pixels.
The current control's height based on whether the control is expanded or not.
Gets the top selector name for the CSS Class.
The root CSS class name used by the control.
Add created child controls to Page.
Creates the accordion's header placeholder.
An instance of the class.
Creates the accordion's content placeholder.
An instance of class.
Sends server child control content to a provided HtmlTextWriter object, which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the objects for the control.
A collection of instances.
Registers the script references for the control.
A collection of instances with the required client-script blocks.
Gets the accordion's expand direction.
Expand direction of the parent accordion.
Url path for the button's image in the navigation pane when using the Outlook-style user interface.
Navigation pane button name when using the Outlook-style user interface.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the accordion pane will be removed from accordion.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
True if the control is visible on the page; otherwise False.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets the string identifying the control.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the panel is in an expanded state.
Serializes C1Accordion Control.
Initializes a new instance of the C1AccordionSerializer class.
Provides a custom implementation to add deserialized objects to the items collection.
This method primarly used by control developers.
Target collection to add items.
Item to be added to the collection.
Returns True if the "item" object is added to the target collection. Otherwise, False.
Removes all the items from the .
Target collection to remove items from.
Retuns True if all the items are successfully removed from the collection. Otherwise, False.
Gets a unique name for .
Returns a unique name like "C1Accordion1Pane2".
Finds a Control recursively. Note finds the first match and exists
The owner.
The id.
Represents a collection of C1AccordionPane objects that are used by the Panes property.
Initializes a new instance of the C1AccordionPaneCollection class.
Parent C1Accordion class instance.
Removes all items from collection.
Adds a new menu item to the end of the list.
Insert a item into a specific position in the collection.
Item position. Value should be greater or equal to 0
The new item.
Removes the specified item from the list.
The item to be removed.
Removes an item from the list using its index.
The index of the item to be removed.
The AccordionItemEventArgs is used to provide notification when
Accordion items are created, databound, etc.
Container control for the Accordion item
Type of the Accordion item (i.e. Header or Content)
Initializes a new instance of the AccordionItemEventArgs class.
The container of the accordion item.
The accordion item type.
Gets the DataItem being bound to the Container.
Gets the container of the accordion item.
Gets the type of the Accordion item (either Header or Content).
Gets the DataItem being bound to the container.
Gets the index of the DataItem being bound to the container.
The AccordionCommandEventArgs provides access to the container AccordionContentPanel for data commands.
Container
Constructor
Container
Command Name
Command Argument
Gets the container for the ContentPanel.
Expand direction.
Top.
Right.
Bottom.
Left.
C1BorderBox.
C1MultiPage is a control that manages a collection of page fragments, only one page is displayed at a time.
Constructor of C1MultiPage class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
Moves to the first page.
Moves to the last page.
Moves to the previous page.
Moves to the next page.
Gets the index of page with the specified page view ID.
The page view ID.
The indes of the page; -1 if not found.
Selects the page view by the index.
The page view index.
Selects the page view by the ID.
The page view ID.
Removes the page view at the specified index.
The page view index.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets the built in CSS class for the control.
The CSS class name string.
Sends server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object,
which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
Saves any server control view-state changes that have occurred since the time the page was posted back to the server.
Returns the server control's current view state.
Restores view-state information from a previous page request that was saved by the SaveViewState method.
An Object that represents the control state to be restored.
Gets a collection of script descriptors that represent ECMAScript (JavaScript) client components.
Registers the script libraries for the control.
The collection of the script libraries.
LoadPostData.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
Fires the BeforeSelectedIndexChange event.
The cancelable event argument.
Fires the SelectedIndexChanged event.
The event argument.
Gets a collection of page views.
Gets or sets the index of the selected page view.
Gets the selected page view.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the page index is displayed.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the tool bar is displayed.
Gets or sets text displayed on the first button.
Gets or sets text displayed on the previous button.
Gets or sets text displayed on the next button.
Gets or sets text displayed on the last button.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether page views are displayed one by one automatically.
Gets or sets the delay time of each page in AutoPlay mode.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to go back to the first page automatically when the last page is reached.
This value takes effect when AutoPlay is set to true.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether postback to server when switching between page views.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether validation is performed when switching between page views.
Gets or sets the group of controls for which the multipage control causes validation when it posts back to the server.
Defines names of the visual styles what embeded into control's assembly.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether only the selected page view is displayed.
Generally, you have to turn on the AutoPostBack when setting this property to true.
In this situation, there is only one page rendered by the server, and when navigating to
another page view, the control will post back to server and request a new page.
Gets or sets a value indicate if a C1MultiPage control is enabled.
Animation effect while switching between pages.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Specifies the transition for animation.
Occurs before the SelectedIndex is changed.
Occurs when the SelectedIndex is changed.
Handler name of the client BeforeSelectedIndexChange event.
Handler name of the client SelectedIndexChanged event.
A individual page fragment for the C1MultiPage control.
Constructor of the C1PageView class.
Gets or sets the owner of this page view.
Gets or sets the text associated with this page view.
Gets or sets the value associated with this page view.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
True if the control is visible on the page; otherwise False.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
Returns true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Represents a collection of page views.
Creates an instance of C1PageViewCollection class.
The multipage control owner.
Adds a control to this collection.
The control to be added.
Adds a control to the specified position.
The position to add.
The control to be added.
Clears the collection.
Removes the control from the collection.
The control to remove.
Removes the control at specified position.
The position of the control.
The indexer of this collection.
Page view index.
The C1PageView object at the specified index.
Animation effects while switching between pages.
No effect.
Default page switching behavior.
The current page fades out, then the next page fades in.
The current page slides out while the next page slide in, both from right to left.
The current page slides out while the next page slide in, both from left to right.
The current page slides out while the next page slide in, both from bottom to top.
The current page slides out while the next page slide in, both from top to bottom.
The current page slides out from the right to left, while the next page slides in from the left to right.
The current page slides out from the left to right, while the next page slides in from the right to left.
The current page slides out from the bottom to top, while the next page slides in from the top to bottom.
The current page slides out from the top to bottom, while the next page slides in from the bottom to top.
ComponentOne NavPanel is a web control that allows you to
provide multiple panes and display them one at a time.
C1NavPanel default constructor.
Create child controls collection using Panes collection.
This method preliminary used by control developers.
Indicates if data binding is used for Panes creation.
This method called immediately before Render method.
This method preliminary used by control developers.
Calculate Fill Size for expanded pane(s).
This method preliminary used by control developers.
Calculated headers size.
Collection of expanded panes.
Fill Size for expanded pane.
GetCssLayoutResourcePath.
GetTopSelectorCssClassName.
GetVisualStyleCssClassName.
Creates the pane control that can be added to Panes collection.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects.
Registers the script libraries for the control.
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved.
Saves any state that was modified after the TrackViewState method was invoked.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's ViewState property.
Specifies the transition for animation.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden for C1NavPanel.
This property is hidden. C1NavPanel expand direction is always Bottom.
Outlook user interface settings.
Gets client id of the C1Menu that used for Outlook user interface to hide/show additional buttons.
Returns empty string when property DisplayHiddenTopicsBar is false.
Menu used to hide/show additional buttons.
This property is hidden for C1NavPanel.
Returns a value that indicates whether or not the accordion will show the content of the active pane at the top as in Microsoft Outlook.
A control similar to the TabControl in WinForm version.
Creates an instance of C1TabControl.
Creates an instance of C1TabControl.
Finds the tab page by text.
The text to find.
The index of tab page; -1 if not found.
Finds the tab page by ID.
The ID to find.
The index of tab page; -1 if not found.
Moves to the first tab page.
Moves to the previous tab page.
Moves to the next tab page.
Moves to the last tab page.
Removes the tab page at the specified position.
The index of the tab page.
Gets a collection of script descriptors that represent ECMAScript (JavaScript) client components.
Registers the script libraries for the control.
The collection of the script libraries.
Raises an event for the C1TabControl control when it posts back to the server.
A String that represents the event argument passed to the event handler.
LoadPostData.
When implemented by a class, signals the server control to notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Fires the BeforeSelectedIndexChange event.
The cancelable event argument.
Fires the SelectedIndexChanged event.
The event argument.
Gets the CssClass for the control.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Defines names of the visual styles what embeded into control's assembly.
Gets or sets the alignment of the tabs.
Gets or sets the docking direction of the tabs.
Scroll settings.
Gets or sets the relationship of the text and image.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to postback to the server when clicking the tab.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether validation is performed when a tab is clicked.
Gets or sets the group of controls for which the tab causes validation when it posts back to the server.
Gets or sets the index of the selected tab.
Gets the current selecte page.
Gets the tab page collection.
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
If this value is empty then visual style will be not rendered.
Default value is "ArcticFox".
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
Animation effect while switching between pages.
Expand Animation duration in milliseconds.
Specifies the transition for animation.
Handler name of the client AfterTabSelect event.
Handler name of the client BeforeTabSelect event.
Handler name of the client TabUnSelect event.
Handler name of the client TabMouseEnter event.
Handler name of the client TabMouseOut event.
Occurs before the SelectedIndex is changed.
Occurs when the SelectedIndex is changed.
Represents a single tab page in a C1TabControl.
Constructor of the C1TabPage class.
Sends server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object,
which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
Gets or sets the text displayed on the tab.
Gets or sets the value associated with the tab.
CSS class name used for the tab in selected mode.
CSS class name used for the tab in disabled mode.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in normal state.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in disabled state.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in selected state.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the new tab starts from a new line.
Represents a collection of tab pages.
Creates an instance of C1TabPageCollection class.
The owner of this collection.
Adds a control to this collection.
The control to be added.
Adds a control to the specified position.
The position to add.
The control to be added.
Clears the collection.
Removes the control from the collection.
The control to remove.
Removes the control at specified position.
The position of the control.
Serializes C1TabStrip Control.
Constructor
Overriden.
Overriden.
Represents a single tab in the TabStrip.
The interface for the owner of tabs.
The parent owner.
Gets or sets the selected index.
Gets the selected tab.
Gets the tab collection.
Creates an instance of C1Tab class.
Creates an instance of C1Tab class.
Creates an instance of C1Tab class.
Creates an instance of C1Tab class.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified
System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriterTag. This method is used primarily by control
developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render
HTML content on the client.
Determines if NavigateUrl property match value of url.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
True if the control is visible on the page; otherwise False.
Gets or sets if tab is Visible.
This means that the tab item's html markup will be actually rendered into destination page but display style will be none.
Gets or sets the text displayed on the tab.
Gets or sets the value associated with the tab.
Gets or sets a value that determins whether postback to server when clicking the tab.
Gets or sets the tooltip text for the tab.
CSS class name used for the tab.
CSS class name used for the tab in selected mode.
CSS class name used for the tab in disabled mode.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in normal state.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in disabled state.
Url to the tab image when the tab is in selected state.
The URL to navigate when clicking the tab.
The navigate target when clicking the tab.
Gets the index of this tab its group.
Gets or sets a value that determines the enable state of this tab.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the tab is selected.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the new tab starts from a new line.
Gets or sets the ID of the PageView in a C1MultiPage that will be switched when this Tab is pressed.
Scroll settings.
Gets or sets the alignment of the child tabs.
Gets or sets the relationship of the text and image for the child tabs.
Gets or sets the index of the selected tab in the child group.
CSS class name used for the child tab group.
Gets the collection of tabs.
Gets parent tab owner.
Represents the collection of tabs.
Adds a tab object.
The C1Tab object to add.
Adds an array of tabs.
The array of tabs.
Inserts a tab object at specified position.
The position to insert.
The C1Tab object to insert.
Removes the specified oab object.
The C1Tab object to remove.
Gets the index of tab object.
The C1Tab object.
The index of the tab.
Searches node through the collection by the Text.
First node that match the searched text.
Searches node through the collection by the Value.
node property
First node that match the searched text.
The indexer of the tab collection.
The index of tab object to access.
The tab object at specified position.
CSS class name used for the tab group.
Represents a TabStrip control that contains a row of tabs and separators.
Interface that defines the fields the data bound properties to bind.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.Text property.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.Value property.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.NavigateUrl property.
Gets or sets the name of the master id field in hierachical databinding.
Gets or sets the name of the parent id field in hierachical databinding.
Creates an instance of C1TabStrip class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
Gets the common Css file.
Determines whether the tabstrip is in horizontal direction.
Gets the CSS class name for the control.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
RenderContents override
HtmlTextWriter
LoadPostData.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
Searches through the collection by the NavigateUrl.
Recursive searching is used until is found.
First that match the searched text.
Searches through the collection by the Text.
Recursive searching is used until is found.
First that match the searched text.
Searches through the collection by the Value.
Recursive searching is used until is found.
property
First that match the searched value.
Fires the SelectionChanged event.
The event argument.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Gets or sets the direction of the tabs.
Gets or sets if tabstrip is Enabled.
Gets or sets orientation of the tabstrip.
Gets or sets the default alignment of the tabstrip.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to postback to the server when clicking the tab.
Gets or sets the URL of the page to post to from the current page when a tab is clicked.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether validation is performed when a tab is clicked.
Gets or sets the group of controls for which the tab causes validation when it posts back to the server.
Defines names of the visual styles what embeded into control's assembly.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.Text property.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.Value property.
Gets or sets the name of the data field to bind to the C1Tab.NavigateUrl property.
Gets or sets the name of the master id field in hierachical databinding.
Gets or sets the name of the parent id field in hierachical databinding.
Gets or sets the ID of the C1MultiPage control to associate with this tabstrip.
Scroll settings.
Gets or sets the relationship of the text and image for the child tabs.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether this instance is dirty.
true if this instance is dirty; otherwise, false.
Gets or sets the index of the selected tab.
CSS class name used for the child tab group.
Gets the collection of tabs.
Gets parent tab owner.
Occurs when tab selection is changed.
Handler name of the client AfterTabSelect event.
Handler name of the client BeforeTabSelect event.
Handler name of the client TabUnSelect event.
Handler name of the client TabMouseEnter event.
Handler name of the client TabMouseOut event.
Enumeration that determines the alignment of tabs.
Aligns to the left.
Aligns to the center.
Aligns to the right.
Justify alignment.
Enumeration that determines the direction of tabs comparing to the content.
The tabs are displayed in top direction.
The tabs are displayed in right direction.
The tabs are displayed in bottom direction.
The tabs are displayed in left direction.
Enueration that determines the alignment of scroll buttons.
Both of the buttons are aligned to the start side.
The buttons are aligned at the separate sides.
Boths of the buttons are aligned to the end side.
Enumeration that determines the scroll mode.
No scroll supported.
Scrolling is performed by clicking the scroll buttons.
Scrolling is performed by clicking or horvering over the scroll buttons.
Scrolling is performed by hovering close to region of start or end side.
Enumeration that determines the z-index order of overlapped tabs.
Next tab overlaps previous tab.
Previous tab overlaps next tab.
Represents a container that holds the contents of a
templated treeview node in a C1TreeView control.
Initializes a new instance of the C1TreeViewNodeTemplateContainer class
using the specified C1TreeViewNode index and C1TreeViewNode.
Sends server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object,
which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
Gets or sets the menu item associated with the container.
Gets the index of the menu item associated with the container.
Generates the appropriate alert for the control at runtime. Call this method in the OnPreRender()
override.
True if the control has a valid license.
The page.
The control.
Gets the eval message alert code.
Call this method from Render override.
This method preliminary used by control developers.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Boolean flag that identifies design time.
Represents a slider in an ASP.NET Web page.
DecreBtn
Track
IncreBtn
Thumb
Thumb2
Slider
SelectedRegion
SelectedRegion2
Default Animation Duration.
Default Length value.
C1Slider constructor
Rises ValueChanged event.
A C1SliderEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Rises Value2Changed event.
A C1SliderEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Create selected region2 for the slider.
Create thumb2 button for the slider.
Notify to create child controls.
Adjust value.
The original value
The adjusted value
Sets the value to the specified name property of the specified object.
The specified object.
The specified property name.
The property's value.
Create decrement button for the slider.
Create track for the slider.
Create increment button for the slider.
Create selected region for the slider.
Create thumb button for the slider.
Create container for the slider.
Create slider's elements.
Gets the class name of visual style.
Determine compound css class.
Raises the Init event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Get the reference of the postback event.
Return a string value
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved with the System.Web.UI.WebControls.WebControl.SaveViewState() method.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves any state that was modified after the System.Web.UI.WebControls.Style.TrackViewState() method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's System.Web.UI.Control.ViewState property.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
Notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Fires when the slider value has been changed.
Fires when the slider value2 has been changed.
Fires on client side before the value2 of the slider is changing.
Fires on client side when the value2 is changing.
Fires on client side when the value2 has been changed.
The property should be used to render extra areas in track bar of the C1Slider.
The property should be used to exhibit interaction with two thumb button of the C1Slider.
Show or hide the thumb2 button.
Gets or sets the value2 of slider.
Gets the C1SliderButton object that defines the information for decrement button of slider.
Gets the C1SliderButton object that defines the information for increment button of slider.
Gets the C1SliderButton object that defines the information for thumb button of slider.
Gets or sets the height of the slider.
Gets or sets the width of the slider.
Gets the unique, hierarchically qualified identifier for server control.
The direction in which control is laid out.
Gets or sets the length of the control.
Gets or sets the maximum value of slider.
Gets or sets the minimum value of slider.
Gets or sets the step with which the slider value will change.
Gets or sets the value of slider.
Define how long (in milliseconds) the animation of the sliding will run.
The easing that is applied to the animation.
Reverse increment decrement button.
Show or hide the decrement button.
Show or hide the increment button.
Show or hide the thumb button.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
Gets or sets if slider is Enabled.
Gets or sets if ViewState is enabled.
Gets or sets if slider is Visible.
Path to visual styles.
VisualStyle name.
Gets or sets tooltip text what will be displayed when mouse is over slider.
Gets or sets the background color of the control.
Color of the border around the control.
Style of the border around the control.
Width of the border around the control.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Changed the type of control's tag.
The tooltip displayed when the mouse is over the decrement button.
The tooltip displayed when the mouse is over the increment button.
The tooltip displayed when the mouse is over the thumb button.
The tooltip displayed when the mouse is over the thumb2 button.
Fires on client side when the slider is initialized.
Fires on client side before the value of the slider is changing.
Fires on client side when the value is changing.
Fires on client side when the value has been changed.
Fires on client side when the button of slider is clicked.
Fires on client side when the mouse is down on the button of slider.
Fires on client side when the user moves the mouse pointer outside the boundaries of the button.
Fires on client side when the mouse is over the button.
Fires on client side when the mouse is released from the button.
Serializes C1Slider Control.
Constructor
C1SliderEventArgs is used by the ValueChanged event.
C1SliderEventArgs constructor.
Gets the Object that raised the event.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the ValueChanged event.
Constructor.
Serializable Object.
Constructor.
Represents a dialog window.
C1Window is a pop-up window can be used to display a message, ask for confirmation, user input and so on.
C1Window has Client-Side Object Model (CSOM) that mostly repeats the Server-Side Object Model.
This means methods and read or write properties may be called on the client side like on the server side.
To access CSOM, use this syntax: <ClientID>.control.
The example below demonstrates how to get and show a dialog window via JavaScript.
<script type="text/javascript">
var dialog = $get("C1Window1").control;
dialog.show();
</script>
By default C1Window is hidden on the Page.
To get a dialog window to be visible on load,
set the ShowOnLoad to True.
There are two modes of dialog boxes: modal and modeless.
To show a dialog in modeless mode call show(),
to show a dialog in modal mode call showModal().
C1Window requires that Microsoft AJAX Extentions be installed and a ScriptManager is on the page.
Microsoft AJAX Extentions can be found at http://ajax.asp.net/. For more information about
Microsoft ASP.NET AJAX Extensions, see Microsoft's ASP.Net AJAX Web site.
Json helper to save/load control state to/from client control
Creates an instance of C1Window.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
Adds a control to the dialog window.
The control to be added.
Takes effect if dialog works in UpdatePanel mode, when the property is empty.
The example shows how to add a control to a dialog window.
Label l = new Lablel();
l.ID = "label1";
l.Text = "Search results:";
dialog.AddControl(l);
OnInit override.
OnLoad override.
At this point tree view raise all its events.
AddAttributesToRender override.
Html text writer object.
Create child controls
PreRender
Event args
Render HTML structure for this control
OutPut stream
Sets attributes for children controls.
For IamgeUrl, IconStyle and Text may be changed to value post back from client, they have to be set before rendering.
Set window design time content area bound.
RenderContents override
HtmlTextWriter
Sets visibility of caption buttons and status bar
add invisible css to a control
target html control
visible or not
Create Header Controls for web dialog
Create Content Controls for web dialog
Create dialog footer controls
instantiating a div HtmlGenericControl
instantiating a div HtmlGenericControl
Load Json properties from data posted back from client
json Data
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to C1Window object.
An System.Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Ssaves the changes to a C1Window object's view state to an System.Object.
The System.Object that contains the view state changes.
Instructs the this class to track changes
to its view state.
GetScriptReferences override.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the dialog window may be moved.
The default value for AllowMove is True.
By default users may move the dialog window by dragging the title across the page.
Set AllowMove to False if you want the window to hold the designated position.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the dialog window may be resized.
The default value for AllowResize is False. The dialog window may be resized by the image element on right-bottom corner only.
Gets or sets the animation effect to use when content area of a C1Window object is collapsing.
The default value is AnimationEffect.None.
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when content area of a C1Window object is collapsing.
The default value is 1000 and unit is millisecond.
Gets or sets the animation effect to use when content area of a C1Window object is expanding.
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when content area of a C1Window object is expanding.
Gets or sets the animation effect to use when a C1Window object hides.
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when a C1Window object hides.
Gets or sets the animation effect to use when a C1Window object shows.
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when a C1Window object shows.
Gets a object that provides access to C1Window title items like an icon, buttons, and so on.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether child controls acts as triggers when the dialog window works in UpdatePanel mode.
Default value is True.
Gets or sets URL to the content of the dialog window.
Gets or sets a value determining the visibility of the caption buttons.
True if buttons are visible, False otherwise.
The default value is True.
Gets or sets the template for the content area of the control.
Use the ContentTemplate property to control the contents of the dialog window.
To specify a template for the dialog, reset the property, place the <ContentTemplate> tags between the opening and closing tags of the control.
You can then list the contents of the template between the opening and closing <ContentTemplate> tags.
Path to visual styles.
Image Url for C1Window icon.
Gets or sets height of title icon.
Unit for this property is pixle.
Gets or sets width of title icon.
Unit for this property is pixle.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
If this value is empty then visual style will be not rendered.
Default value is "ArcticFox".
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Gets or sets a value indicate if a C1Window object is enabled.
Dialog horizontal position if Position = {Page, Parent}
Dialog vertical position if Position = {Page, Parent}
Gets or sets an ID of a form element which is used as a zone to minimize all dialog windows.
Gets or sets a value indicate whehter to close activated window on pressing esc button.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side after dialog is activated.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when one of the caption buttons is clicked after dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when one of the caption buttons is clicked before dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side after dialog is deactivated.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog enters dragging mode.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is being dragged.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog exits dragging mode.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side after dialog is hidden.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is maximized before dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is maximized after dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is minimized before dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is minimized after dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is normalized before dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is normalized after dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog content is reloaded before dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog content is reloaded after dialog handles the operation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog enters resizing mode.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is being resized.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog exits resizing mode.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side after dialog is shown.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is pinned before the dialog handles the opertation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets a name of the client side function that should be fired on client side when dialog is pinned after the dialog handles the opertation.
There are two arguments that are passed to the function:
sender: dialog object that fired the event.
e: object that provides data for the event.
See client side object model section in documentation for more details.
Gets or sets an html element id at which top left corner a dialog window will be placed when shown first time.
Takes precedence of property if set.
Set resizing properties for C1Window.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the dialog window is visible on the page after the page is loaded.
Default value of ShowOnLoad is False
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the a modal window is visible on the page after the page is loaded.
Default value of is False.
And setting this property to true will set property to true;
Gets or sets initial position the dialog window.
Gets or sets the initial horizontal position (X) of the dialog window if is Manual.
Gets or sets the initial vertical position (Y) of the dialog window if C1Window.StartPosition is Manual.
Gets or sets the template for the status content area of the control.
Use the StatusTemplate property to control the contents of the dialog window status bar.
Gets or sets value indicating whether status is visible or not.
Gets or sets text which dispayed on the caption bar of the C1Window dialog window.
Gets or sets width of .
Gets or sets height of .
Auto Expand window.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web
server control.
A button that can be shown in the caption box.
Item that can be shown in the caption box, like an item or button.
assign json data to properties
Under lying html element for this element.
Gets or sets value indicating whether the element is visible or not.
The default value is True.
Gets or sets the text displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the button.
Provides access to C1Window caption box items like an item or button.
Construct a CaptionButtons object.
Parent C1Window object.
Assign json data to captionbuttons properties
json data hashtable
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to CaptionButtons object.
An System.Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Ssaves the changes to a CaptionButtons object's view state to an System.Object.
The System.Object that contains the view state changes.
Test object is null.
Object subject to test
True for null
Instructs the this class to track changes
to its view state.
Button that collapse or expand the dialog..
Button that closes the C1Window.
An image shown on the left side of the C1Window title area.
Button that resizes the C1Window to fit all available space in the browser window.
Minimize and normalize caption button
Button that pins and unpins the C1Window.
Button that reloads the C1Window content set by the property.
A button that can be shown in the caption box,
can be in two states: pressed and unpressed.
Gets or sets whether caption button state
Gets or sets tool tip for caption button in pressed state
Specifies the initial position of a object.
Default position of the C1Window.x = y = 0
Center of the page.
Center of the parent element of the dialog window.
Position determines by the and properties.
OffSet Mode
Horizontal position
Left region
Center rgion
Right region
Vertical position
Top region
Middle region
Bottom region
Struct that hold addtional info for visual style.
Class that represents the appearance and behaviors information of slider buttons.
ResizeBehaviorSettings constructor.
The specified C1Splitter object.
Image url for button in the slider user interface.
Image url for button when the mouse is over the button of slider.
Image url for button when the mouse is down on the button of slider.
C1Slitter is a container control that consists a movable bar that divides a container's display area into two resizable panels.
Creates a new instance of the C1Splitter class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
Notify to create child controls.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based
implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Create a container for the control.
Return a Web control.
Create a Expander for the control.
Return a Web control.
Reset style for bar.
Change orientation of C1Splitter.
Change VisualStyle for C1Splitter.
The old VisualStyle.
The new VisualStyle.
Create a bar for the control.
Return a Web control.
Reset style for panels.
Gets a panel1 for the control.
Return a ContentPanel.
Gets a panel2 for the control.
Return a ContentPanel.
Reset SplitterDistance.
Gets the class name of visual style.
Return the class name of visual style.
Gets prefix name.
Return the prefix name.
Determine compound css class.
Return a string.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Raises the Init event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved with the System.Web.UI.WebControls.WebControl.SaveViewState() method.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves any state that was modified after the System.Web.UI.WebControls.Style.TrackViewState() method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's System.Web.UI.Control.ViewState property.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
Notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control is full of document.
Gets or sets the border color of the Web control.
Gets or sets the height of the slider.
Gets or sets the width of the slider.
Gets a SplitterBar object that defines the information for splitter bar.
Gets the SplitterPanel object that defines the information for top or left panel of splitter.
Gets the SplitterPanel object that defines the information for bottom or right panel of splitter.
Gets the ResizeBehaviorSettings object that defines the animation while the bar of splitter is beeing dragged.
Gets or sets the location of the splitter, in pixels, from the left or top edge of the C1Splitter.
Gets or sets a value indicating the horizontal or vertical orientation of the C1WebSplitter panels.
The splitter style for the Web control.
Fires on client side when the splitter is initialized.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called at client side when start dragging the splitter.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called at client side when finish dragging the splitter.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called at client side when dragging the splitter.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called before panel1 is collapsed.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called when panel1 is collapsed by clicking the collapse/expand image.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called before panel1 is expanded out.
Gets or sets the javascript function name that would be called when panel1 is expanded out by clicking the collapse/expand image.
Path to visual styles.
VisualStyle name.
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Changed the type of control's tag.
Gets or sets if slider is Enabled.
The SplitterStyle for C1Splitter.
no visual
Serializes C1Splitter Control.
Constructor
Class that represents the appearance and behaviors information of splitter bar.
ResizeBehaviorSettings constructor.
The specified C1Splitter object.
Define how long (in milliseconds) the animation of the sliding will run.
The easing that is applied to the animation.
Gets or sets the movement span of incremental resizing.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether an outline of the element is sized.
Class that represents the appearance and behaviors information of splitter bar.
SplitterBar constructor
The specified C1Splitter object.
Gets or sets the width of the splitter bar in pixels.
Gets or sets the css class name for rendering the splitter bar.
Gets or sets the css class name for rendering the splitter bar while mouse is over it.
Gets or sets the css class name for rendering the splitter bar while it is collapsed.
Gets or sets the css class name for rendering the splitter bar while it is beeing dragged.
Gets or sets the url of image that to collapse the splitter bar.
Gets or sets the url of image that to expand the splitter bar.
Gets or sets the url of image that to collapse the splitter bar when mouse is over it.
Gets or sets the url of image that to expand the splitter bar when mouse is over it.
Gets or sets the tooltip when mouse is over the splitter bar.
Class that represents the appearance and behaviors information of splitter panel.
SplitterPanel constructor.
The specified C1Splitter object.
Gets or sets the template for the content area of the C1Splitter control.
Gets or sets the minimum distance in pixels when resizing the splitter.
Gets or sets the type of scroll bars to display for splitter panel.
Gets or sets the background color for splitter panel.
Gets or sets the background image url for splitter panel.
Gets or sets a value determining whether splitter panel is collapsed or expanded.
Gets or sets the css class name for splitter panel.
Class that represents template container of SplitterPanel.
Class that represents the appearance and behaviors information of resizer..
ResizeBehaviorSettings constructor.
C1Window object.
Define how long (in milliseconds) the animation of the sliding will run.
The easing that is applied to the animation.
Gets or sets the movement span of incremental resizing.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether an outline of the element is sized.
Gets or sets the maximum height(in px) of C1Window object.
Default is 10000px;
Gets or sets the maximum width(in px) of C1Window object.
Default is 10000px;
Gets or sets the minimum height(in px) of C1Window object.
Default is 1px;
Gets or sets the minimum width(in px) of C1Window object.
Default is 1px;
The ratio between the height and width will be maintaned while sizing.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to use a resizing proxy.
Represents group item that will show child items on same level.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Determines the list item CSS classes.
string with space separated CSS classes that will be placed on LI tag.
this property should be hidden.
width of the menu group.
height of the menu group.
Gets or sets CSS class that will be placed on nested group container element that used as group or sub-menu container.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether or not child menu items will be checkable.
If true then CSS class "C1CheckableSupport" will be added to scroll container element.
Sub-menu or nested group orientation.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group width in pixels.
Gets or sets sub menu or nested group height in pixels.
This property is not applicable for group.
This property is not applicable for group.
This property is not applicable for group.
Represents Header item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Renders the item contents.
The writer.
Determines the list item CSS classes.
string with space separated CSS classes that will be placed on LI tag.
this property should be hidden.
Gets or sets whether the item is header and will be used as group title. This means what heading tags h1– h6 will be used to render text inside item.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
This property is not applicable for header.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
Represents Separator item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Renders the item contents.
The writer.
Determines the list item CSS classes.
string with space separated CSS classes that will be placed on LI tag.
this property should be hidden.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
This property is not applicable for separator.
C1NavPanel Pane.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The C1NavPanel.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The header text.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the objects for the control.
A collection of instances.
Gets the general layout orientation of the panel.
Provides panels that can hold one or more controls which
implements the IC1CanDockControl interface.
C1ToolBarContainer constructor.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
s
Gets control css class name by visual style
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
Registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Specifies whether the C1ToolBarContainer can autosize to fit its child's bounds.
Specifies whether the C1ToolBarContainer is laid out horizontally or vertically.The default layout is horizontal.
Gets an arraylist value which contains ids of all children.
Gets an arraylist value which contains ids of all dockable children.
Gets an arraylist value which contains ids of all dockable children.
Gets the HTML tag for the control.
Path to visual styles.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
"ArcticFox" is default value.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Value: DockPartner
All definitions CSS class name.
Value: C1DockPartner
CSS aggregate class name.
Converts the value of this instance to a System.String.
Constructor.
IDockable.
Add attributes to render.
HtmlTextWriter
Add dockable control and dock partner to the parent control by dock type.
parent control.
container control.
Represents information about browser what initiated Page request.
Constructor.
Returns true if browser is Internet Explorer.
Returns true if browser is Firefox.
Returns true if browser is Safari.
Gets Major Version number of the browser.
E.g. for IE value can be 5,6 or 7.
C1Toolbar is an ASP.NET control that is used as a container to hold other controls such as buttons, check buttons, text boxes, drop-down lists, split-buttons, and separators. C1ToolBar provides six different objects to support the various types of controls used in the C1ToolBar: C1ToolBarGroup, C1ToolBarButton, C1ToolbarDropDownList, C1ToolbarCheckButton, C1ToolbarSplitButton, and C1ToolBarSeparator.
IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner interface.
ToolBar items collection
ToolBar item owner.
Text
Index
IC1ToolBarItemContainer interface.
Unselect all toolbar items.
ToolBar item container's selection mode.
The count of selected items.
C1ToolBar's constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The key.
Every toolbar render css at design-time
set renderDesignTimeCss to false to prevent this behavior.
Set all items unselected.
Raise ItemClick event.
Raise ItemChecked event.
Raise ItemPropertyChanged event.
A C1ItemPropertyChangedEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raise ItemSelect event.
Override DataBind method.
Override EnsureDataBound method.
Create child controls from items.
The value determines whether the databind method is performed.
Create child controls from items.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Index location.
The value determines whether the databind method is performed.
Override FindControl method.
Override PerformDataBinding method.
Internal DataBind's method.
The specified IHierarchicalEnumerable object.
Gets the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
The specified string.
Return the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Creates new instance of the C1ToobarItem class.
Return the specified C1ToolBarItem object.
Loads child items from json's data.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Json's data.
Return a bool value whether the ViewState is changed or not.
Loads item property's value from json's data.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Json's data.
Return a bool value whether the ViewState is changed or not.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets definitions what will be used by control only at run-time.
Primarily this method is used by control developers. Note, style sheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
OnInit override.
Used to manipulate statically created nodes.
Override OnPreRender method.
System.EventArgs is the base class for classes containing event data.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Override RenderEndTag method.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders the content elements of .
Convert a Unit value to an int value.
The specified unit value.
Return a int value which converts from a unit value.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Raise postback event.
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves the changes to a server control's view state to an Object.
The Object that contains the view state changes.
Instructs the server control to track changes to its view state.
When implemented by a class, processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
True if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise,false.
When implemented by a class, signals the server control to notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
When implemented by a class, enables a server control to process an event raised when a form is posted to the server.
A System.String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
Fires when the toolbar item's property changed.
Fires when the check state of an item changes.
The CheckBoxes property must be set to true in order for check boxes to be displayed.
This event will only be fired when a checkbox button item is checked. If the CheckOnClick property is set to true,
user clicks the checkbox button will trigger this client side event and when the AutoPostBack property is set to true,
page will post back to the server and then this server side event will be fired.
If the CheckOnClick property is set to true,
user presses the access key will also trigger this client side event and when the AutoPostBack property is set to true,
page will post back to the server and then this server side event will be fired.
If the CheckOnClick property is set to false, only when user clicks the checked area before text will trigger this client side event and when the AutoPostBack property is set to true,
page to post back to the server and then this event will be fired.
Occurs when a ToolBar item in a C1ToolBar control is clicked.
Use this event to determine which C1ToolBarItem was clicked. This event is triggered before the Click event.
The standard Click event is generated if the mouse is clicked on any party of the C1ToolBar control.
The ItemClick event is generated only when the mouse is clicked on the text or image of a C1ToolBarIItem object.
Fires when an item is selected.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the toolbar control can be dragged to rearrange its position.
If false, only a single item can be selected in the all of the groups in the control.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the Web server control.
Use the AccessKey property to specify the keyboard shortcut for the Web server component.
This allows you to navigate quickly to the component by pressing the ALT key and the key for the specified character on the keyboard.
For example, setting the access key of a component to the string "D" indicates that the user can navigate to the component by pressing ALT+D.
Sets or retrieves a value that indicates whether or not the control posts back to the server each time a user interacts with the control.
Gets or sets if toolbar is Enabled.
Gets or sets if ViewState is enabled.
Gets a collection of C1ToolBarItem objects that represent all C1ToolBar items such as the ToolBarButton, Group, ToolBarCheckButton, ToolBarDropDownList, ToolBarSplitButton, and ToolBarSeparator. The Items property returns a C1ToolBarItemCollection object that contains a collection of C1ToolBarItem objects.
Specifies whether the toolbar and its items show the rounded corner.
Gets or sets the width of the control.
Gets or Sets the Height of the Control.
Gets or sets if toolbar is Visible.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
Returns true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folders. The default value for this property is '~/C1WebControls/VisualStyles'
Gets or sets the visual style name that determines the overall appearance of the control.
This property allows you to quickly customize the appearance of the ToolBar so it matches the appearance of your application.
The settings available include ArcticFox which is the default value, Office2007Black, Office2007Blue, Office2007Silver, Vista, and VistaBlack.
Determines whether or not toolbar dropdown list position will be adjusted to fit in window bounds.
Default value is false.
Gets or sets the tooltip text that will be displayed when the mouse is over the item.
Gets or sets the mode of selection for the items in the control.
The count of selected items.
The property is hidden.
Specifies the type of scroll settings that can be used on the C1Toolbar.
Use this property to specify the scroll button types,
scroll button position, scroll content height and width, scroll button orientation, and scroll step.
Defines which borders of the control are bound to the container.
Use the C1ToolBar.Dock property to define how a toolbar is automatically resized as its parent control is resized.
For example, setting dock to Left causes the toolbar to align itself with the left edges of its parent control and to resize as the parent control is resized.
Specifies the position and manner in which a control is docked.
Use the C1ToolBar.DockMode property to define the docking behavior of a toolbar control.
By default, if the control is dragged over a C1ToolBarContainer control and the mouse is released,
then the control will be docked to the left edge of the C1ToolBarContainer.
Get the string value of Href's attribute.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Gets the control's tag key.
Gets client id of ScrollContainer.
Specifies whether the C1ToolBar is laid out horizontally or vertically. The default layout is horizontal.
The index of items.
Gets DataBindings property.
Gets a value indicating whether the C1ToolBar is need post back or not.
If specified, this template will be added to all toolbar items that will not have other defined templates.
If specified, this template will be added to all toolbar items instead of top level toolbar items.
If specified, this template will be added to top level toolbar items.
Fires on client side when toolbar item is focused.
Fires on client side when toolbar item looses focus.
Fires on client side when mouse is over toolbar item.
Fires on client side when mouse becomes out of a toolbar item.
Fires on client side when mouse is down on toolbar item.
Fires on client side when mouse is up on toolbar item.
Fires on client side when toolbar item is checked.
Fires on client side when toolbar item is clicked.
Fires on client side when toolbar item is selected.
Fires on client side when toolbar item's nested list is opened.
Fires on client side when toolbar item's nested list is closed.
Gets a value indicating whether or not the C1ToolBar generates DataBinds automatically.
Gets or sets Owner property.
Gets or sets Text property.
Represents an ASP.NET toolbar button. The C1ToolBarButton object defines a toolbar button.
A button can include text, image, or text and image.
Set text with the Text property, and an image with the Image property for each C1ToolBarButton object.
The buttons can be added at design-time using the designer, programmatically using Add or Remove methods from the C1ToolBarItemCollection collection,
or on the client-side by using the removeAt client-side method.
The C1ToolBarItem object represents link type items and provides the following three properties specific to link items: NavigateUrl property, Target property, and Text property. All toolbar items and child toolbar items are stored in the Items collection. C1ToolBar items can be a link item, button item, list item, group item, or separator item.
Represents C1ToolBarItemBase, a base class for toolbar items and toolbar group.
C1ToolBarItemBase's constructor.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves the changes to a server control's view state to an Object.
The Object that contains the view state changes.
Instructs the server control to track changes to its view state.
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves the changes to a server control's view state to an Object.
The Object that contains the view state changes.
Instructs the server control to track changes to its view state.
fires after C1ToolBarItem's collection changed.
sender
C1ToolBarItemCollectionChangedEventArgs
Specifies whether the item shows the rounded corner.
Gets or sets the text caption for the toolbar item.
Gets or sets the value for the toolbar item.
Gets or Sets the Visibility of C1ToolBarItem.
Gets or sets if toolbar item is Visible.
This means that toolbar item html markup will be actually rendered into destination page but display style will be none.
Gets or sets the CssClass for the toolbar item.
This property should be hidden
Gets or sets the name for the toolbar item.
This property is hidden for design time properties editor.
Gets index of the ToolBar item within parent owner.
Gets or Sets the StaticKey for C1ToolBarItem.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the ToolBar item is enabled.
Get a bool value that indicates whether the server control is saving changes to its view state.
Gets this item's inner items.
Gets this item's inner items.
Gets this item's owner.
Gets this item's owner.
Creates a new instance of the C1ToolBarItem class
Override RenderConntents method.
Load properties's data from json's data.
Json's data.
The list of C1ToolBarItemPropertyChangedEventArgs
Return a bool value indicating whether the viewstate is changed or unchanged.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
IsFirstItem Method
Indicates if this toolbar item is first in parent owner Items collection.
This method returns true when toolbar item is first.
IsLastItem Method
Indicates if this toolbar item is last in parent owner Items collection.
This method returns true when toolbar item is last.
IsOddItem Method
Indicates if this toolbar item is odd in parent owner Items collection.
This method returns true when toolbar item is odd.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Binds a data source to invoked server control and all its child controls with an option to raise the System.Web.UI.Control.DataBinding event.
Gets field's value.
The specified object.
The specified PropertyDescriptorCollection.
The specified property name.
The property's value.
Internal DataBind method.
The specified IHierarchicalEnumerable.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding.
The object copy deeply.
Object
Override FindControl method
Gets whether the item is templated.
The Item's inner html which has been created by client side.
Gets or sets the template that will be used for this toolbar item.
Gets or set the container for C1ToolBarItem's template.
Determines whether validation is performed when the item is clicked.
Gets or sets an optional parameter passed to the ItemClick and ItemSelected events of the component along with the associated CommandName.
Use the CommandArgument property to specify a parameter that complements the CommandName property.
The CommandArgument property complements the CommandName property by allowing you to provide additional information about the command to perform.
For example, if you set the CommandName property to Sort and the CommandArgument property to Ascending,
you specify a command to sort in ascending order.
Gets or sets the command name associated with the Item passed to the ItemClick and ItemSelected events of the component.
When you have multiple C1ToolBarButton items in the control use the CommandName property to specify the command name associated with each C1ToolBarButton item.
You can set the CommandName property with any string that identifies the command to perform.
You can then programmatically determine the command name of the C1ToolBarButton item and perform the appropriate actions.
Specifies whether the itme shows the rounded corner.
Gets or sets the text caption for the toolbar item.
Gets or sets the ToolTip text displayed when the mouse pointer rests over the item.
String representing keyboard shortcut to call the click event on this item.
Gets index of the ToolBar item within parent owner.
Gets or sets the URL to link to when the hyperlink is clicked in the item. Default value is empty string.
Gets or sets the target window or frame to display the Web page content linked to when the toolbar item is clicked or enter key pressed. Default value is empty string.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that will be rendered into this item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that will be displayed for the disabled item.
Gets or sets the URL path that will be displayed for the selected item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that will displayed when the mouse is over the item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that will be displayed when the mouse hovers over the selected item.
Gets or sets the URL path to the image that will be displayed when the item is disabled and selected.
Gets or sets flow side for the image. See ImageUrl.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the ToolBar item is enabled.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the current item is selected.
Gets image's container of the Toolbar item.
Gets text's container of the Toolbar item.
Gets the System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriterTag value that corresponds to this Web
server control.
Gets C1ToolBar object of the ToolBar item.
C1ToolBarButton's constructor.
This property should be hidden
C1ToolBarCheckButton defines a toolbar check button on a toolbar.
By default, the C1ToolBarCheckButton includes an image for the rectangular box and text that indicates a choice a user can make by selecting the button.
Check buttons enable users to choose from one or more options that are not mutually exclusive.
The C1ToolBarCheckButton changes between two states when clicked.
C1ToolBarCheckButton's constructor
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
override CreateChildControls method.
Load properties's value from josn's data.
Josn'data.
The list of C1ItemPropertyChangedEventArgs.
Return a bool value indicating whether the viewstate is changed or unchanged.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the C1ToolBarCheckButton item is pressed or not pressed.
If true, the button includes a checkmark and it appears pressed.
If false, the button does not include a check mark and it appears not pressed.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the C1ToolBarCheckButton should automatically appear pressed in and not pressed in when clicked.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the C1ToolBarCheckButton is in the pressed or not pressed state by default, or is in an indeterminate state.
This property should be hidden
All ClientType Constant.
Value: C1ToolBar
Value: C1ToolBarItem
Value: C1ToolBarButton
Value: C1ToolBarCheckButton
Value: C1ToolBarDropDownList
Value: C1ToolBarGroup
Value: C1ToolBarSeparator
Value: C1ToolBarSplitButton
All constants in C1ToolBar class.
Value: ScrollPanel
Value: floater
Value: noroundedcorner
Value: toolbar-container
Value: toolbar-outer
Value: toolbar-inner
Value: toolbar-content
All Constants in C1ToolBarCheckButton class.
Value: item-checkbuttonimage
Value: group-container
Value: group-outer
Value: group-inner
Value: group-content
Value: group-nested-items
All constants in C1ToolBarItem class.
Value: item-text
Value: item-image
Value: item-content
Value: item-container
Value: item-outer
Value: item-inner
All constants in C1ToolBarDropDownBase class.
Value: arrow
Value: dropdown-container
Value: list-container
Value: item-list-container
Value: _items-container
All constants in C1ToolBarScrollPanel class.
Value: FlowPanel
All definitions CSS class name.
Value: C1tbTemplate
Value: C1tbNoRoundedCorner
Value: C1tbNoRoundedCorner-Focus
Value: C1tbListItem-NoRoundedCorner-Selected
Value: C1ToolBar
Value: C1tbFloater
Value: C1tbContainer
Value: C1tbOuter
Value: C1tbInner
Value: C1tbContent
Value: C1tbList
Value: C1tbListItem
Value: C1tbListItem-NoRoundedCorner
Value: C1tbFirstItem
Value: C1tbLastItem
Value: C1tbAlternatingItems
Value: C1tbFirstItem-Selected
Value: C1tbLastItem-Selected
Value: C1tbAlternatingItems-Selected
Value: C1tbFirstItem-LastItem
Value: C1tbFirstItem-LastItem-Selected
Value: C1tbLink
Value: C1tbHeading
Value: C1tbTextNode
Value: C1tbImageNode
Value: C1tbCheckButtonImage
Value: C1tbHover
Value: C1tbFocus
Value: C1tbListItem-Focus
Value: C1tbActive
Value: C1tbSelected
Value: C1tbListItem-Selected
Value: C1tbSelected-Disabled
Value: C1tbOpened
Value: C1tbClosed
Value: C1tbDisabled
Value: C1tbChecked
Value: C1tbIndeterminate
Value: C1tbCheckButton
Value: C1tbCheckButtonContianer
Value: C1tbDropDownList
Value: C1tbDropDownList-NoRoundedCorner
Value: C1tbGroup
Value: C1tbTopPaddingGroup
Value: C1tbBottomPaddingGroup
Value: C1tbSeparator
Value: C1tbSplitButton
Value: C1tbSplitButton-NoRoundedCorner
Value: C1tbSplitButton-Selected
Value: C1tbSplitButton-NoRoundedCorner-Selected
Value: C1tbDropDownList-Selected
Value: C1tbDropDownList-NoRoundedCorner-Selected
Value: C1tbNestedListContainer
Value: C1tbNestedList
C1tbDropDown-NestedList
Value: -Horizontal
Value: C1ToolBar-Horizontal
Value: -Vertical
Value: C1ToolBar-Vertical
Value: C1tbToolBarItemArrow
Value: C1tbDropDownContainer
Value: C1tbDropDownListNoArrow
Value: C1tbImageBeforeText
Value: C1tbTextBeforeImage
Value: C1tbImageAboveText
Value: C1tbTextAboveImage
Value: C1tbScrollContainer
Value: C1tbImageTextBlank
CSS aggregate class name.
Converts the value of this instance to a System.String.
Is a base class that provides common properties and functionality for all items in C1ToolBar's object model.
C1ToolBarDropDownBase's constructor
Set all items unselected.
Fires after the C1ToolBarItemCollection's item changed.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Override FindControl method
Gets or sets the collection of items when the dropdown button is clicked. Every item is a C1ToolBarButton.
Gets or sets the type of expand animation effect.
Use this property to specify the animation effect when the user opens the dropdown object.
Gets or sets the animation duration.
This property can be used to specify how long the dropdown items in the C1ToolBar will be open.
Gets or sets the expand delay in milliseconds before the sub toolbar item starts to popup. The default value is 100ms.
Gets or sets the type of collapse animation effect.
The collapse animation effect occurs while the dropdown items in the C1ToolBar close.
Gets or sets the animation duration.
This property can be used to specify how long the dropdown items in the C1ToolBar will be hidden.
Gets or sets the collapse delay in milliseconds before the sub toolbar item starts hiding. Default value is 100ms.
Gets or sets the transition effect when the dropdown toolbar items start collapsing or stops collapsing.
To use a transition effect, the CollapseAnimation or ExpandAnimation property must be set to an animation type before you set the CollapseEasing property or ExpandEasing property.
The default transition effect is EaseLinear. This effect moves smoothly from start to end without acceleration or deceleration.
Gets or sets the transition effect when the dropdown toolbar items start expanding or stops expanding.
To use a transition effect, the CollapseAnimation or ExpandAnimation property must be set to an animation type before you set the CollapseEasing property or ExpandEasing property.
The default transition effect is EaseLinear. This effect moves smoothly from start to end without acceleration or deceleration.
Gets the index of selected item.
Gets the index of selected items.
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets the mode of selection for the items in the control.
The count of selected items.
The property is hidden.
Creates a new instance of the C1ToolBarDropDownList class.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether an arrow is displayed on the C1ToolBarDropDownList item,
which indicates that further options are available in a drop-down list.
This property should be hidden
Specifies the state of a toolbar control that can be checked, unchecked,
or set to an indeterminate state.
The control is unchecked.
The control is checked.
The control is indeterminate. An indeterminate control generally has a shaded appearance.
Specifies the position and manner in which a control is docked.
The control is not docked.
The control's top edge is docked to the top of its containing control.
The control's bottom edge is docked to the bottom of its containing control.
The control's left edge is docked to the left edge of its containing control.
The control's right edge is docked to the right edge of its containing control.
All the control's edges are docked to the all edges of its containing
control and sized appropriately.
Specifies the position and manner in which a control is docked.
The control is able to be both docked and undocked.
The control will be docked when control is over the dockable zone.
The control will always be floating.
Specifies the selection mode of the items in a group of the control.
No item can be selected in the group.
One item can be selected in the group.
One or more items can be selected in the group.
Can unselect the selected item.
Always has selected item.
Specifies whether the image and text are rendered.
The text is rendered only.
The image is rendered only.
The image and text are rendered.
The C1ToolBarGroup object defines a group of toolbar elements.
C1ToolBarGroups are typically used when a group of functions are mutually exclusive.
That is, only one of the functions represented by the group of buttons can be on at a time.
Creates a new instance of the C1ToolBarGroup class.
Set all items unselected.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
fire after C1ToolBarItemCollection's item changed
Load properties's data from json's data.
Json's data.
The list of C1ToolBarItemPropertyChangedEventArgs
Return a bool value indicating whether the viewstate is changed or unchanged.
Override FindControl method
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the group is enabled.
Gets or sets the item that is located at a specified index of the collection.
Gets or sets the text caption for the toolbar item.
Specifies whether the group and its itmes show the rounded corner.
Gets or sets the mode of selection for the items in the control.
The count of selected items.
The property is hidden.
This property should be hidden
Override control's tag.
Represents a C1ToolBarItemBinding class to specify
the relationship of the data field and C1ToolBarItem's properties.
Creates new instance of the C1ToolBarItemBinding class.
Creates new instance of the C1ToolBarItemBinding class.
Data member to bind a toolbar item.
ToString override.
string.
Clone this object.
Loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An Object that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves the changes to a server control's view state to an Object.
The Object that contains the view state changes.
Instructs the server control to track changes to its view state.
Judge whether the current property is empty.
The specified property name.
Returns true if the current property is empty.
Sets the state of the StateBag object as well as
the Dirty property of each of the StateItem objects contained by it.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the AccessKey property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the data member to bind a toolbar item.
Gets or sets the URL field to the disabled image that is displayed next to the text of a toolbar item to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Enabled property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the display format
for the text of a toolbar item to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ImageUrl property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the MouseOverImageUrl property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ImageUrlSelected property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ImageSelectedDisabledURL property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the ImageSelectedHoverURL property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the NavigateUrl property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Target property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Text property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Tooltip property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets or sets the name of the field from the data source to bind to the Value property of a C1ToolBarItem object to which the C1ToolBarItemBinding object is applied.
Gets a value indicating whether a server control is tracking its view state changes.
Gets a dictionary of state information that allows you to save and
restore the view state of a server control across multiple requests for the same page.
Gets or sets the schema associated with the object.
Represents a collection of C1ToolBarItemBinding objects that are used by data-bound C1ToolBar control.
Static C1ToolBarItemBindingCollection constructor.
C1ToolBarItemBindingCollection constructor.
C1ToolBarItemBindingCollection constructor.
The collection's owner
Appends the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object to the end of the collection.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object that will be added to the collection.
Returns the current collection's length.
Determines whether the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object is in the collection.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Returns true if the current collection contains the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Overloaded. Copies the contents of the current C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
The C1ToolBarItemBinding array.
The zero-based index in array at which copying begins.
Determines the index of the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object in the collection.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Returns the index in array at which the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object is.
Adds the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object to the collection at the specified index location.
index location.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Removes the specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object from the collection.
The specified C1ToolBarItemBinding object.
Removes the C1ToolBarItemBinding object at the specified index location from the collection.
The specified index at which the item will be moved.
OnClear override.
OnRemoveComplete override.
override.
CreateKnownType override.
SetDirtyObject override.
GetKnownTypes override.
Get binding by index.
The specified index.
Returns the corresponding C1ToolBarItemBinding according to specified index.
Represents a collection of C1ToolBarItem objects that are used by Items property.
Creates an instance of the C1ToolBarItemCollection class.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Adds an element into list.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner obj.
Adds the elements of a C1ToolBarItem's collection to the end of list.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner array.
Inserts a IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object into list.
index location.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Removes item from list.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Removes item from list by index.
index location.
Removes all item from list.
Set the item of list.
index location.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Inserts a IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object into list.
index location.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Removes item from list by index.
index location.
Searches for the specified object and returns the zero-base index of the list.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Returns the zero-base index of the list.
Loads the view state in the item.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves the view state for the item.
Tracks the view state for the item.
Loads the view state in the item.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves the view state for the item.
Tracks the view state for the item.
Loads child control's ViewState.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves child control's ViewState.
Tracks child control's ViewState.
Set dirty for the object.
Item changed.
Occurs after collection was changed.
Occurs before collection was changed.
Gets or set the specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
index location.
Return the specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Get a bool value that indicates whether the server control is saving changes to its view state.
Gets ViewState property.
Get a bool value that indicates whether the server control is saving changes to its view state.
Represents a C1ToolBarItemList. It is used in the dropdown or split button.
Creates an instance of the C1ToolBarItemList class
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
The specified C1ToolBarItemCollection object.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Gets the control's tag key.
Represents a container that holds the contents of a
templated menu item in a C1ToolBar control.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolBarItemTemplateContainer class
using the specified toolbar item index and toolbar item.
Index location.
The specified C1ToolBarItem object.
OnBubbleEvent override.
The Source of the event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets or sets the item associated with the container.
Gets the index of the item associated with the container.
Gets the item associated with the container.
Gets the index of the item associated with the container.
Gets DisplayIndex property.
Instance of this class wraps toolbar items to the scroll panel.
C1ToolBarScrollPanel's constructor.
The specified IC1ToolBarItemCollectionOwner object.
Create controls for ScrollContainer.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override Render method.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Gets FlowPanel property.
Gets ScrollContainer property.
C1ToolBarSeparator defines a separator element on a toolbar.
Creates an instance of the C1ToolBarSeparator class.
The separator appears as a solid or dashed vertical line for horizontal toolbars and a horizontal line for vertical toolbars.
Proper use of separators can help chunk the information on a toolbar and make it easier to memorize.
You can define a new line image for the C1ToolBarSeparator using its CSS selectors.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
this property should be hidden
This property should be hidden
Serializes C1ToolBar Control.
Constructor.
Serializable Object.
Constructor.
The C1ToolBarSplitButton object defines a split toolbar button.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Load properties's data from json's data.
Json's data.
The list of C1ToolBarItemPropertyChangedEventArgs
Return a bool value indicating whether the viewstate is changed or unchanged.
The index of the button which properties will be used by default when the EnabledDefaultButton property set to true.
Gets or sets a value, indicating if the C1ToolBarSplitButton will use the DefaultButton behavior.
The current item's index which is in SplitButton's item list.
This property should be hidden
C1ItemPropertyChangedEventArgs is used by the ItemPropertyChanged event.
C1ToolBarItemPropertyChangedEventArgs's constructor.
The specified C1ToolBarItem object.
The property's name.
The property's new value.
An Item in the control which raised an event.
Gets property's name.
Gets new value of the property.
C1ToolBarEventArgs is used by the following events: ItemClick, ItemSelected, and ItemPopulate.
C1ToolBarEventArgs's constructor.
The specified C1ToolBarItem object.
C1ToolBarEventArgs's constructor.
The specified C1ToolBarItem object.
The source of command.
The specified CommandEventArgs object.
Gets the source of command.
Gets an Item in the control which raised an event.
C1ToolBarItemCollectionChangedEventArgs is used for the C1ToolBarItemCollectionChange event.
constructor of the C1ToolBarItemCollectionChangedEventArgs
indicate the item which to be add or remove from the C1ToolBarItemCollection.
indicate the ChangeStatus of the C1ToolBarItemCollection.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the PropertyChanged event.
The specified object.
The specified C1ToolBarItemPropertyChangedEventArgs object.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the items.
The source of the event
C1MenuEventArgs object that contains the event data
Specifies change status.
add.
remove.
Defines a property which determines the position in which
the dock control will be docked.
DockStyle
ComponentOne Calendar Control for ASP.NET.
Construct a new instance of C1Calendar.
Fires the SelectedDatesChanged event.
The event arg.
Fires the DisplayDateChanged event.
The event arg.
Gets the CSS class name for the control.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is enabled.
Determines whether to display days that belong to other month in a month view.
Determines whether the calendar is in popup mode. User has to call client side methods PopupAt/PopupBeside to popup the calendar.
Determines the date format for tooltip when mouse is over the calendar days.
Gets or sets the number of rows in month view.
Gets or sets the number of columns in month view.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether post back to server automatically when user selects a date.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether post back to server automatically when user navigates between months.
Gets or sets the culture information for the calendar control rendering.
CultureInfo object that is currently used by the control.
Gets or sets the display format for week headers.
Gets or sets the display format for calendar days.
Determines whether to display the calendar title.
Determines the string that displays on calendar title.
CalenderTitle is the group tile shared by all the month views. To change the title for month views, you have to use
MonthViewTitle property.
The title string can be any string or string that has date formatting parameters.
At most four parameters are accepted, each can has its own data format. They are:
{0} - The value of DiaplayDate.
{1} - The first month of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
{2} - The last month of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
{3} - The number of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
For example:
"Schedule of {0:MMMM yyyy}".
"{1:MMMM yyyy} to {2:MMMM yyyy}"
Determines the string that displays on month view title.
MonthViewTitle is the tile display on each month view. To change the top most group title shared by month views, you have to use
CalendarTitle property.
The title string can be any string or string that has date formatting parameters.
At most four parameters are accepted, each can has its own data format. They are:
{0} - The value of DiaplayDate.
{1} - The first month of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
{2} - The last month of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
{3} - The number of month views, when multiple monthes are displayed.
For example:
"Schedule of {0:MMMM yyyy}".
"{1:MMMM yyyy} to {2:MMMM yyyy}"
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to display month navigator.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether can change the view to month/year/decade while clicking on the calendar title.
Gets or sets the tooltip string displayed for the next navigation button.
Gets or sets the tooltip string for the previous navigation button.
Gets or sets the tooltip string for the next quick-navigation button.
Gets or sets the tooltip string for the previous quick-navigation button.
Gets or sets the number of months to swap after clicking the navigation button.
Gets or sets the number of months to swap after clicking the quick-navigation button.
Gets or sets the slide style while month swapping.
Gets or sets the display type of navigation buttons.
Animation duration in milliseconds.
Specifies the transition for animation.
Gets or sets whether the preview area is displayed.
Gets or sets the tooltip string for the previous preview button.
Gets or sets the tooltip string for the next preview button.
Gets or sets the first day of week.
Gets or sets the disable dates collection.
Gets or sets the maximal date for selection.
Gets or sets the minimal date for selection.
Gets the collection of custom days.
You can specify custom styles for specific calendar day by defining CustomDay.
C1WebCalendar supports hosting templates in calendar day cells.
To add template controls, you have to:
1. Click the ellipsis button right beside the DayTemplates in property grid to open the DayTemplates collection editor.
2. Add template to this collection, give proper ID.
3. Select "Edit Templates" in smart tag.
To "bind" template to a calendar day, you have to:
1. Click the ellipsis button right beside the CustomDays in property grid.
2. Add CustomDay in this collection.
3. Specify the TemplateID and Date property. The TemplateID should be the ID of template added in the above steps.
Gets the template collection.
C1WebCalendar supports hosting templates in calendar day cells.
To add template controls, you have to:
1. Click the ellipsis button right beside the DayTemplates in property grid to open the DayTemplates collection editor.
2. Add template to this collection, give proper ID.
3. Select "Edit Templates" in smart tag.
To "bind" template to a calendar day, you have to:
1. Click the ellipsis button right beside the CustomDays in property grid.
2. Add CustomDay in this collection.
3. Specify the TemplateID and Date property. The TemplateID should be the ID of template added in the above steps.
The header template of Calendar.
Gets or sets the string for the header template of C1Calendar.
The footer template of Calendar.
Gets or sets the date for the current display month.
Gets or sets the number of month view columns.
Gets or sets the number of month view rows.
Gets or sets the spacing between month views.
Determines whether to display week days.
Determines whether to display week numbers.
Determines the selection mode.
Gets or sets the latest selected date.
Gets or sets the selected dates collection.
Gets or sets the names of the days of the week, starting with the name for Sunday.
Gets or sets the 3-letter abbreviations for the names of the days of the week.
Gets or sets the month names for the C1Calendar.
Gets or sets the last selected date for C1Calendar.
Gets or sets the C1Schedule control to interact with.
Fires when the SelectedDates property is changed by mouse clicking.
Fires when the DisplayDate property is changed by navigating.
Handler name of the client SelectedDatesChanged event.
Gets or sets the method to be called before calendar is popup.
Gets or sets the method to be called after calendar is popup.
Gets or sets the method to be called before the calendar is closed.
Gets or sets the method to be called after the calendar is closed.
Gets or sets the method to be called when selection is made.
Class that defines the properties for custom days.
Initialize a new instance of CalendarDay.
The date this custom day represents.
The CSS class name of this calendar day.
ID of template added in DayTemplates collection.
Gets or sets the specified template for C1CalendarDay.
Collection of CalendarDay objects.
Initialize a new instance of C1CalendarDayCollection.
Adds a CalendarDay to this collection.
A CalendarDay to add.
The position in this collection.
Adds a range of CalendarDay to this collection.
CalendarDay array.
Clear this collection.
Detects whether the CalendarDay is contained in this collection.
CalendarDay to detect.
True if contained.
Gets the index of a CalendarDay in this collection.
CalendarDay to detect.
Position in this collection.
Inserts a CalendarDay in this collection.
Position to insert.
The CalendarDay to insert.
Removes a CalendarDay from this collection.
The CalendarDay to remove.
Removes a C1CalendarDay from this collection at specified position.
The index of C1CalendarDay in this collection.
Removes a range of CalendarDay in this collection.
Start index.
Number of CalendarDay.
Revers the order of CalendarDays in this collection.
Sorts the CalendarDays in this collection.
Sorts the CalendarDays in this collection.
Custom comparer.
Converts the collection to CalendarDay array.
Array of CalendarDay.
Indexer of this collection.
The template host for custom days.
Constructor of C1CalendarDayTemplate.
Gets or sets the ITemplate for the custom calendar day.
Collection class for C1CalendarDayTemplate.
Adds a C1CalendarDayTemplate object to the collection.
The C1CalendarDayTemplate to be added.
Adds an array of C1CalendarDayTemplate objects.
The array of the C1CalendarDayTemplate objects to be added.
Clears this collection.
Detects whether the C1CalendarDayTemplate object is contained in this collection.
The C1CalendarDayTemplate object to be detected.
True if exists.
Removes a C1CalendarDayTemplate object from this collection.
The C1CalendarDayTemplate object to be removed.
Removes a C1CalendarDayTemplate object at specified position from this collection.
Gets the number of C1CalendarDayTemplate objects contained in this collection.
Indexer of this collection.
Determines the format for displaying the week day.
Displays the first single letter of the day of the week.
Displays the first two letters of the day of the week.
Displays the abbreviated name of the day of the week.
Displays the full name of the day of the week.
Determines the format for displaying the month day.
Displays the day in month. Single-digit days will not have a leading zero.
Displays the day in month. Single-digit days will not have a leading zero.
Determines the mode of selection.
Selection is not allowed.
Only one single day can be selected.
More days can be selected, by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Week days are selectable.
Week numbers are selectable.
Entire month is selectable.
Animation effects while switching between months.
No effect.
Default month view switching behavior.
The current month view fades out, then the next month view fades in.
The current month view slides out while the next month view slide in, both from right to left.
The current month view slides out while the next month view slide in, both from left to right.
The current month view slides out while the next month view slide in, both from bottom to top.
The current month view slides out while the next month view slide in, both from top to bottom.
The current month view slides out from the right to left, while the next month view slides in from the left to right.
The current month view slides out from the left to right, while the next month view slides in from the right to left.
The current month view slides out from the bottom to top, while the next month view slides in from the top to bottom.
The current month view slides out from the top to bottom, while the next month view slides in from the bottom to top.
Enumeration that determines the display of navigation buttons.
No navigation buttons are displayed.
Displays the previous and next buttons.
Displays the previous, next, quick previous and quick next buttons.
Container control that is used to instantiate calendar day template.
Wrapper class that stores calendar date for persisting.
Initialize a new instance of C1Date.
Initialize a new instance of C1Date.
The date stored in this wrapper.
Initialize a new instance of C1Date.
Year.
Month.
Day.
Gets or sets the date stored in this wrapper.
Collection of C1Date.
Initialize a new instance of C1DateCollection.
Adds a C1Date object that wrapps the specified date in this collection.
Date to add.
Position in this collection.
Adds a C1Date object in this collection.
C1Date to add.
Position in this collection.
Adds a range of C1Date objects.
C1Date object array.
Adds a range of C1Date objects that represents the dates.
Start date.
End date.
Clears the collection.
Clone the C1DateCollection.
New C1DateCollection.
Determines whether the date is contained by one of wrapper in this collection.
Date object to detect.
True if contained.
Determines whether the C1Date is contained in this collection.
C1Date object to detect.
True if contained.
Detects the index of C1Date object that represents the specified date.
The date to detect.
Index of C1Date object that represents the specified date.
Detects the index of C1Date object that represents the specified date.
THe date to detect.
Index of C1Date object that represents the specified date.
Inserts the C1Date object in this collection.
Insert position.
C1Date to insert.
Removes the C1Date object from the collection.
C1Date object to remove.
Removes the C1Date object from the position.
Positon of C1Date object.
Sorts the C1Date collection.
Sorts the C1Date collection by using the specified comparer.
IComparer
Converts the C1Date collection to array.
C1Date object array.
Indexer of this collection.
Represents a C1Editor in an ASP.NET Web page.
Creates a new instance of the C1Editor class.
Raises TextChanged event.
The specified EventArgs object.
Raises TextSaved event.
The specified EventArgs object.
Client Encode
The specified string.
Return a string.
Client Decode
The specified string.
Return a string.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based
implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Create a dialog for the control.
Create a sub dialog for the control.
Create a spell checker dialog for the control.
Ends the path with a slash character if it does not has.
Gets the URL of image resource.
The specified name.
The specified type.
Return image url.
Gets the class name of visual style.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Override this method if you want to render additional stylesheets definitions what will be used by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Get content of dialog by name.
The specified dialog name.
Return a string.
Get content of embedded resource.
The specified name.
The specified Assembly object.
Return a string.
Get reference of CallbackEvent.
The specified parameter.
The ClientID of control.
The context of control.
Return a string.
base64Encode
The string data.
Return a string.
base64Decode
The string data.
Return a string.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
Notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
TextChanged event.
TextSaved event.
SpellChecker dictionary path.
Example of the relative path: "~/Dictionaries/C1Spell_de-DE.dct"
Indicates whether to show SpellChecker dialog or just allow a user to select suggestions from context menu.
Gets or sets the height of the C1Editor.
Gets or sets the width of the slider.
Editor mode (WYSIWYG/Code/Split).
Show the path selector.
Full screen mode. Set this property to true if you want to switch editor to FullScreen Mode. All client area of the page will be covered by WebEditor.
Full screen mode container ID. Use this property to specify container which will be used as the parent control for FullScreenMode instead of client's area on the web page.
Gets or sets the virtual path of the folder, where C1Editor will automatically save the valid files after the FileUpload of dialog completes.
The HTML text to edit.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Path to visual styles.
VisualStyle name.
Changed the type of control's tag.
Gets or sets if control is Enabled.
Returns javascript string with reference to javascript object
C1EditorConst
Insert
Format
Action
Font
Paragraph
Review
Tables
Breaks
Forms
Special
save_tb
edit_tb
font_tb
para_tb
review_spell_tb
review_inspect_tb
table_tb
table_edit_tb
break_tb
forms_tb
link_tb
special_tb
The HttpHandler for dialog.
Get the type of document.
Return the specified LiteralControl object.
Reset margin and padding of the specified HtmlControl.
The specified HtmlControl.
Create a html element.
Return a html element.
Create a head element for page.
Return a page element.
Create a body element.
Return a body element.
Create a form.
Return a form.
Create controls for WEB page.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event to initialize the page.
An System.EventArgs that contains the event data.
Get dialog control.
The specified name.
Return a control.
constructor.
The specified C1Editor object.
Create child controls for container.
The container.
constructor.
The specified C1Editor object.
Create child controls for container.
The container.
Represents the DesignView in C1WebEditor.
constructor.
The specified C1Editor object.
The specified bool value.
Create child controls for container.
The container.
Represents the SourceView in C1WebEditor.
constructor.
The specified C1Editor object.
The bool value.
Create child controls for container.
The container.
None
Redo
Undo
BackColor
Indent
Outdent
Bold
Borders
Br
Copy
Cut
Print
Button
Checkbox
Dropdown
Form
Hiddenfield
Imagebutton
Listbox
Passwordfield
Radiobox
Textarea
Textbox
ForeColor
Findandreplace
Fullscreen
Hr
Imagebrowser
Italic
Justifycenter
Justifyfull
Justifyleft
Justifyright
Link32
ListOrdered
ListUnordered
Media
Paragraph
Paste
Preview
Printpagebreak
Removeformat
Save32
Selectall
SourceMode
Specialcharacters
Spellcheck32
SplitMode
Table32
Taginspector
Deletecell
Deletecolumn
Deleterow
Edittable
Insertcell
Insertcolumn
Insertrow
Inserttable
Mergecell
Splitcell
Template
TextStrike
TextSubscript
TextSuperscript
Timestamp
Underline
Wrap
WysiwygMode
Enumeration that represents Set of predefined ToolBars
available to the end-user.
None of predefined ToolBars are available to the end-user.
Common ToolBar.
Style ToolBar.
Formatting ToolBar.
TableEditing ToolBar.
HTML Elements ToolBar.
EditorMode ToolBar.
Allows all ToolBars. It is the default value.
Represents editor mode (WYSIWYG/Code/Split).
WYSIWYG mode.
Code editing mode.
Split mode.
None of predefined buttons of the CommonToolBar are available to the end-user.
Full Screen
Save
Preview
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All
Undo
Redo
Find and replace
Show Table Borders
Insert Hyperlink
Insert special character
Insert Date and Time
Tag inspector
Image Browser
Spell Check
Cleanup HTML
Allows all buttons of the CommonToolBar.
Print
None of predefined buttons of the StyleToolBar are available to the end-user.
DropDown CSS Class
DropDown Format
DropDown Font
DropDown Size
Bold
Italic
Underline
Strikethrough
Subscript
Superscript
Remove Format
Allows all buttons of the StyleToolBar.
None of predefined buttons of the FormattingToolBar are available to the end-user.
Insert Break
Insert Paragraph
Insert Print Page Break
Insert Horizontal Line
Justify Left
Justify Center
Justify Right
Justify Full
Numbered List
Bulleted List
Outdent
Indent
Background Color
Font Color
Allows all buttons of the FormattingToolBar.
None of predefined buttons of the TableEditingToolBar are available to the end-user.
Insert Table
Edit Table
Insert Column
Insert Row
Insert Cell
Split Cell
Delete Row
Delete Column
Delete Cell
Merge Cell
Allows all buttons of the TableEditingToolBar.
None of predefined buttons of the HtmlElementsToolBar are available to the end-user.
Insert Form
Insert TextArea
Insert TextBox
Insert Password Field
Insert Hidden Field
Insert ListBox
Insert DropDownList
Insert Radio Button
Insert CheckBox
Insert Image Button
Insert Button
Insert Media
Allows all buttons of the HtmlElementsToolBar.
None of predefined buttons of the EditorModeToolBar are available to the end-user.
Design View
Source View
Split View
Word Wrap
Allows all buttons of the EditorModeToolBar.
EditorRibbonGroups
Action
Font
Paragraph
Review
Tables
Breaks
Breaks
Special
Provides a unified way of converting types of RemovedButtonNames to other types, as well
as for accessing standard values and subproperties.
Returns whether this converter can convert an object of the given type to
the type of this converter, using the specified context.
An System.ComponentModel.ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context.
A System.Type that represents the type you want to convert from.
true if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false.
Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified
context and culture information.
An System.ComponentModel.ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context.
The System.Globalization.CultureInfo to use as the current culture.
The System.Object to convert.
An System.Object that represents the converted value.
Converts the given value object to the specified type, using the specified
context and culture information.
An System.ComponentModel.ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context.
A System.Globalization.CultureInfo. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed.
The System.Object to convert.
The System.Type to convert the value parameter to.
An System.Object that represents the converted value.
Represents a ColorDialog in an ASP.NET Web page.
Defines the properties, methods that are shared by dialog.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based
implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for
posting back or rendering.
Gets content of embedded resource.
The specified file name.
Return a string.
Find control from web page.
The specified control.
The ID of control.
Return a control.
Find control from web page.
The ID of control.
Return a control.
Gets the file name of embedded resource.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Load event.
The System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets file name of UserControl.
Represents a HyperLinkDialog in an ASP.NET Web page.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Load event.
The System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raise click event for upload button.
The specified object.
The specified EventArgs object.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
Gets file name of UserControl.
Represents a ImageEditorDialog in an ASP.NET Web page.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raise click event for upload button.
The specified object.
The specified EventArgs object.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Load event.
The System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Load files.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
The designated file types on the validity
The specified file name.
Return a bool value.
Gets file array.
Return a array.
Match the image file.
The specified FileInfo object.
Return a bool value.
Gets directory array.
Return a array.
Gets file name of UserControl.
Represents a TemplateDialog in an ASP.NET Web page.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raise click event for delete button.
The specified object.
The specified EventArgs object.
Raise click event for delete button.
The specified object.
The specified EventArgs object.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Load event.
The System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Load files.
Match the image file.
The specified FileInfo object.
Return a bool value.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
Gets file array.
Return a array.
Gets file name of UserControl.
The base class for other Gauges.
Clean up any resources being used.
Loads a Gauge definition from an XML file.
Loads a Gauge definition from a .
Saves a Gauge definition into an XML file.
Saves a Gauge definition into an XML file.
Saves a Gauge definition into a .
Saves a Gauge definition into a .
Loads a Gauge from an .
Saves a Gauge definition into an .
Loads a Gauge view from an XML file.
Loads a Gauge view from a .
Saves a Gauge view into an XML file.
Saves a Gauge view into an XML file.
Saves a Gauge view into a .
Saves a Gauge view into a .
Loads a Gauge view from an .
Saves a Gauge view into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns True if the Gauge can handle mouse messages.
Raises the event.
Raises the event.
Raises the event.
Clears all collections and resets the properties to their default values.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
Function that interpolates the current value to 0-1.
Gauge's value (between Minimum and Maximum).
0 when value is the Minimum, 1 when value is the Maximum, something between 0 and 1 in other cases.
Function that interpolates a 0-1 range to the Gauge's value.
The alpha.
Minimum when alpha is 0, Maximum when value is 1, something between Minimum and Maximum in other cases.
Gets or sets the bound data value associated with the main pointer.
Use this property to bind the Gauge to values that can be null.
Gets or sets the bound data value associated with pointer #0 from the collection.
Gets or sets the bound data value associated with pointer #1 from the collection.
Gets or sets the bound data value associated with pointer #2 from the collection.
Gets or sets the bound data value associated with pointer #3 from the collection.
This event is for internal use only.
This event is for internal use only.
Gets the owner control.
Gets a value indicating whether the Gauge has already been disposed.
Gets or sets a name associated with the Gauge.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets the size and location of the Gauge, in pixels, relative to the parent control.
Gets the collection of the Gauge decorators.
Gets the collection of shapes in the bottom layer (between the background and the decorators).
Gets or sets whether the should appear in front of the other Gauges.
Gets the collection of shapes in the top layer (over everything).
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for text font and color.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for value colors.
Gets the collection of templates for value images.
Specifies the bounds of the Gauge working area.
Gets the collection of the other pointers, except the main pointer.
Gets the main Gauge pointer.
Gets or sets the current value of the Gauge.
Minimum value for the Gauge.
Maximum value for the Gauge.
Optimizes painting for the case if the and properties are variable.
Gets or sets if it uses a logarithmic scale. When true, uses the LogarithmicBase.
Gets or sets the log base used when the IsLogarithmic is set to True.
Gets or sets whether scale values should appear in reversed order (from Maximum to Minimum).
Gets or sets whether the Gauge is visible.
Gets or sets whether the Gauge is enabled.
Occurs when the property changes for some Gauge pointer.
Occurs when the property changes for the main pointer.
Occurs when or converts a value to the string representation.
Control that shows a linear Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Orientation of the .
Gets or sets the fraction-based position where the longitudinal axis starts.
Gets or sets the fraction-based length of the longitudinal axis.
0 represents 0, and 1 represents the length of the .
Negative values invert the direction of the longitudinal axis.
Gets or sets the fraction-based position used when the is set to Double.NaN.
Set to Double.NaN to hide the pointer.
Gets or sets the fraction-based location where the transversal axis starts.
Gets or sets the fraction-based length of the transversal axis.
1 represents the whole height (for a horizontal Gauge) or width
(for a vertical Gauge). 0 represents 0.
Negative values invert the direction of the transversal axis.
Control that shows a radial Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Clean up any resources being used.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the fraction-based radius of the .
1 represents the Min(Width, Height) of the Gauge. 0 represents 0.
Fraction-based X coordinate of the pointer origin of the .
The Point (0, 0) corresponds to the top-left corner of the Gauge's viewport
and the Point (0.5, 0.5) is the center of the viewport.
Fraction-based Y coordinate of the pointer origin of the .
The Point (0, 0) corresponds to the top-left corner of the Gauge's viewport
and the Point (0.5, 0.5) is the center of the viewport.
Gets the Gauge pointer cap.
Start angle for the axis. 0 is the topmost point of the circumference.
Sweep angle for the values. The Maximum value will be placed at StartAngle + SweepAngle
unless the scale is reversed.
Gets or sets the angle of the pointer when the value is set to Double.NaN.
Set to Double.NaN to hide the pointer.
Encapsulates properties of a pen used to draw borders of Gauge elements.
This ctor is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the border template.
Gets or sets the style of lines drawn with a border.
Gets or sets the logical thickness of the border. Negative value
specifies the width of the border in pixels.
Gets or sets the Color of the border.
Defines properties of the Gauge pointer cap.
Loads a pointer cap from an .
Saves a pointer cap into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
Gets the owner Gauge.
Gets or sets whether the pointer cap can be hit-tested.
Gets or sets the logical radius of the pointer cap.
Gets the properties of the pointer cap border.
Gets the collection of shapes that form the clipping region.
Adjusts the interior filling of the pointer cap.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Gets the collection of circles for the pointer cap.
Gets or sets the custom image to draw on the pointer cap.
Encapsulates properties of the pointer cap shadow.
Gets or sets whether the pointer cap should appear behind the Gauge pointers.
Gets or sets whether the pointer cap is visible.
Interior filling for the pointer cap.
Initializes a new instance of the circle.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets the owner .
Gets or sets the circle radius in logical coordinates.
Adjusts the interior filling of the circle.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Associates a clipping region with a Gauge element.
Initializes a new instance of the .
Initializes a new instance of the .
This method is for internal use only.
Returns a String that represents the current .
Gets the owner Gauge element.
Gets or sets the name of a Shape that is used for clipping.
An empty string here makes reference to the owner element.
Specifies how the source and given clipping regions are combined.
Gets or sets the scale factor for the given Shape when it is used for clipping.
Properties of the user-defined image displayed on a Gauge.
This ctor is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the image template.
Gets or sets the logical value representing the width of the image.
Can be set to double.NaN (default value) to avoid scaling the image in the X-axis direction.
Gets or sets the logical value representing the height of the image.
Can be set to double.NaN (default value) to avoid scaling the image in the Y-axis direction.
Gets or sets the original image.
Serializes the Image property.
Gets or sets whether the image aspect ratio should be maintained.
Gets or sets whether the predefined size of the image should not changed.
Gets or sets the direction of an image's rotation and the axis used to flip the image.
Allows to modify the image hue by the specified amount (between -180 and 180).
Allows to modify the image saturation by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Allows to modify the image lightness by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Gets or sets the opacity of the image between 0.0 (completely invisible) and 1.0 (opaque).
Defines properties of a shape used for Gauge marks and pointers.
This ctor is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the shape template.
Gets or sets whether the value of the property should be scaled.
Gets or sets whether the value of the property should be scaled.
Gets or sets the angle of the start cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical radius of the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the start cap.
Gets or sets the angle of the end cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical radius of the end cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the end cap.
Gets or sets the angle of the swell on the start cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the angle of the swell on the end cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical length of the swell on the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical length of the swell on the end cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the swell on the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the swell on the end cap.
Encapsulates properties of a brush used to fill Gauge elements.
This ctor is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the filling template.
Gets or sets the type of brush that is used to fill the element.
Gets or sets the Color used to fill the element.
Gets or sets the opacity of the first color between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Gets or sets the second Color that can be used in a gradient or hatch brush.
Gets or sets the opacity of the second color between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Gets or sets whether the should be used instead of and vice versa.
Gets or sets the style of a hatch brush.
Gets or sets the Image in texture brush.
Serializes the TextureImage property.
Gets or sets the wrap mode for the texture brush.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
This ctor is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the gradient template.
Gets or sets the direction of a gradient brush.
Gets or sets the type of a gradient falloff.
Fraction-based X coordinate of the radial gradient center.
Fraction-based Y coordinate of the radial gradient center.
A value from 0 through 1 that specifies the point where the gradient is composed of only the ending color.
Specifies the focus point X coordinate (between 0 and 1) for the radial gradient falloff.
Specifies the focus point Y coordinate (between 0 and 1) for the radial gradient falloff.
Moves the gradient area by the specified relative amount along the X-axis (before scaling).
Moves the gradient area by the specified relative amount along the Y-axis (before scaling).
Scales the width of the gradient area by the specified amount (after translation).
Scales the height of the gradient area by the specified amount (after translation).
Specifies the properties of a brush to paint selection on the hot item.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the first Color of a hatch brush to paint selection on the hot item.
Gets or sets the second Color of a hatch brush to paint selection on the hot item.
Gets or sets the style of a hatch brush to paint selection on the hot item.
Gets or sets the opacity of the hot selection between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Defines properties of the Gauge pointer.
Initializes a new instance of the .
Loads a pointer from an .
Saves a pointer into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
Gets the owner Gauge.
Returns True if this pointer is the main in the owner Gauge.
Gets or sets whether the pointer can be hit-tested.
Gets or sets a name associated with the .
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets the current value scaled by the ValueFactor and ValueOffset.
Gets or sets the current value of the .
Gets or sets the value multiplier to coerce the source scale of the value to the Gauge's scale.
Gets or sets the value offset to coerce the source scale of the value to the Gauge's scale.
Gets or sets the time amount (in seconds) that is taken to move the pointer from Minimum to Maximum.
Gets or sets the logical offset of the pointer.
Gets or sets the end offset of the pointer ( is the start offset).
Gets or sets the logical length of the pointer.
Gets or sets the end length of the pointer ( is the start length).
Alignment of the pointer.
Gets or sets the fixed angle (in degrees) to rotate this pointer.
Gets or sets the logical orthogonal offset of the pointer.
Gets or sets whether the shape of the pointer is inverted.
Selects a shape from the set of predefined pointer shapes.
Gets or sets the logical width of the pointer.
Gets the custom shape of the pointer.
Gets the properties of the pointer border.
Gets the collection of shapes that form the clipping region.
Adjusts the interior filling of the pointer.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Gets or sets the custom image used to draw the pointer.
Encapsulates properties of the pointer shadow.
Gets or sets whether the pointer is visible.
Encapsulates properties of the shadow.
This ctor is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the name of the shadow template.
Gets or sets the opacity of the shadow between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (dark).
Gets or sets the color of the shadow.
Gets or sets the logical X offset of the shadow.
Gets or sets the logical Y offset of the shadow.
Gets or sets whether the shadow is visible.
Associates a value with the Color on a .
Initializes a new instance of the .
Initializes a new instance of the .
Initializes a new instance of the .
Initializes a new instance of the .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns a String that represents the current .
Gets the owner Gauge element.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets or sets the value position where the associated Color appears.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that gives the value associated with this item.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets the Color associated with the value.
Gets or sets the opacity of the color between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Associates a value with the custom image on a .
Initializes a new instance of the .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns a String that represents the current .
Gets the owner Gauge element.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets or sets the value position where the associated image appears.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that gives the value associated with this item.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets the custom image associated with this item.
Specifies the bounds of a Gauge element.
Gets or sets the left and right margins (in pixels).
Negative value expands the width of viewport.
Gets or sets the top and bottom margins (in pixels).
Negative value expands the height of viewport.
Gets or sets the X-offset of the viewport (in pixels).
Negative offset is count from the right edge of the owner element.
Gets or sets the Y-offset of the viewport (in pixels).
Negative offset is count from the bottom edge of the owner element.
Gets or sets the width of the viewport (in pixels).
Zero width extends the viewport till the opposite edge of the owner element.
Negative width extends the viewport backwards.
Gets or sets the height of the viewport (in pixels).
Zero height extends the viewport till the opposite edge of the owner element.
Negative height extends the viewport backwards.
Moves the viewport by the specified relative amount along the X-axis (before scaling).
Moves the viewport by the specified relative amount along the Y-axis (before scaling).
Scales the width of the viewport by the specified relative amount (after translation).
Scales the height of the viewport by the specified relative amount (after translation).
Gets or sets the fixed ratio of width to height of the viewport.
Set to Double.NaN to avoid restriction of the aspect ratio.
Gets or sets the relative X position that remains fixed when the viewport
moves in order to maintain the aspect ration.
Gets or sets the relative Y position that remains fixed when the viewport
moves in order to maintain the aspect ratio.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains a with the specified name.
Determines index of the first with the specified name in the collection.
Removes all common items from the collection, then disposes the items.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines whether this collection contains a with the specified name.
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Determines index of the first with the specified name in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Removes all decorators from the collection, then disposes the decorators.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines whether this collection contains a with the specified name.
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Determines index of the first with the specified name in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Removes all Gauges from the collection, then disposes the Gauges.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines whether this collection contains a with the specified name.
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Determines index of the first with the specified name in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Removes all pointers from the collection, then disposes the pointers.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines whether this collection contains a with the specified name.
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Determines index of the first with the specified name in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Removes all shapes from the collection, then disposes the shapes.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Gets the first with the specified name in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Represents a collection of objects.
Determines whether this collection contains the specified .
Determines the index of a specific in the collection.
Adds the specified to the collection.
Adds a group of objects to the end of the collection.
Inserts the specified into this collection at the given index.
Removes the specified from the collection.
Removes all items from the collection, then disposes the items.
Moves the item with given index (fromIndex) to the new position (toIndex).
Performs additional custom processes after inserting a
into the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after removing a
from the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after setting a
in the instance.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of
the instance.
Performs additional custom processes after clearing the contents of
the instance.
Checks whather the type of the value argument is allowable for this collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified position in the collection.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Defines a common template for various items to be used in multiple elements.
Gets the owner Gauge element.
Gets or sets a name associated with the common item.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the style of lines drawn with a border.
Gets or sets the logical thickness of the border. Negative value
specifies the width of the border in pixels.
Gets or sets the Color of the border.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Initializes a new instance of the .
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets or sets the blending mode for value colors.
Gets the collection of values with their associated colors.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the type of brush that is used to fill the element.
Gets or sets the Color used to fill the element.
Gets or sets the opacity of the first color between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Gets or sets the second Color that can be used in a gradient or hatch brush.
Gets or sets the opacity of the second color between 0.0 (completely transparent) and 1.0 (opaque).
Gets or sets whether the should be used instead of and vice versa.
Gets or sets the style of a hatch brush.
Gets or sets the Image in texture brush.
Serializes the TextureImage property.
Gets or sets the wrap mode for the texture brush.
Defines a template for text font and color to be used in multiple elements.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the Color used to display text label.
Gets or sets the font used to display text label.
Logical value representing the scalable font size.
Set to Double.NaN to use the fixed font size.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Gets or sets the direction of a gradient brush.
Gets or sets the type of a gradient falloff.
Fraction-based X coordinate of the radial gradient center.
Fraction-based Y coordinate of the radial gradient center.
A value from 0 through 1 that specifies the point where the gradient is composed of only the ending color.
Specifies the focus point X coordinate (between 0 and 1) for the radial gradient falloff.
Specifies the focus point Y coordinate (between 0 and 1) for the radial gradient falloff.
Moves the gradient area by the specified relative amount along the X-axis (before scaling).
Moves the gradient area by the specified relative amount along the Y-axis (before scaling).
Scales the width of the gradient area by the specified amount (after translation).
Scales the height of the gradient area by the specified amount (after translation).
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Initializes a new instance of the .
Gets or sets the logical value representing the width of the image.
Can be set to double.NaN (default value) to avoid scaling the image in the X-axis direction.
Gets or sets the logical value representing the height of the image.
Can be set to double.NaN (default value) to avoid scaling the image in the Y-axis direction.
Gets or sets the original image.
Serializes the Image property.
Gets or sets whether the image aspect ratio should be maintained.
Gets or sets whether the predefined size of the image should not changed.
Gets or sets the direction of an image's rotation and the axis used to flip the image.
Allows to modify the image hue by the specified amount (between -180 and 180).
Allows to modify the image saturation by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Allows to modify the image lightness by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Gets or sets the opacity of the image between 0.0 (completely invisible) and 1.0 (opaque).
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Initializes a new instance of the .
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets the collection of values with their associated images.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the opacity of the shadow between 0.0 (transparent) and 1.0 (dark).
Gets or sets the color of the shadow.
Gets or sets the logical X offset of the shadow.
Gets or sets the logical Y offset of the shadow.
Gets or sets whether the shadow is visible.
Defines a template for to be used in multiple elements.
Gets or sets whether the value of the property should be scaled.
Gets or sets whether the value of the property should be scaled.
Gets or sets the angle of the start cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical radius of the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the start cap.
Gets or sets the angle of the end cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical radius of the end cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the end cap.
Gets or sets the angle of the swell on the start cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the angle of the swell on the end cap (between -90 and 90).
Gets or sets the logical length of the swell on the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical length of the swell on the end cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the swell on the start cap.
Gets or sets the logical width of the swell on the end cap.
Base class for all the Gauge decorators.
Initializes a new instance of the decorator.
Loads a decorator from an .
Saves a decorator into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This method is for internal use only.
This method is for internal use only.
This method is for internal use only.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
Gets the owner Gauge.
Gets or sets whether the decorator can be hit-tested.
Gets or sets a name associated with the decorator.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Logical value representing the start location of the decorator.
Alignment of the decorator.
Gets or sets the alignment offset of the decorator (in pixels).
Gets the collection of shapes that form the clipping region.
Encapsulates properties of the decorator shadow.
Gets or sets the name of template for the collection.
Gets or sets the blending mode for value colors.
Gets the collection of values with their associated colors.
Gets or sets whether the decorator is visible.
used to display a sequence of labels on the Gauge.
Base class for the Gauge decorators showing a scale, such as marks or labels.
Base class for the Gauge decorators that spread over a set of values.
Gets or sets the value where the decorator starts. Set to Double.NaN to bind to Gauge's minimum.
Gets or sets the value where the decorator ends. Set to Double.NaN to bind to Gauge's maximum.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that specifies where the decorator starts.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that specifies where the decorator ends.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets the value where the scale graduation starts and the start location and width are defined.
Set to Double.NaN to bind to the value.
Gets or sets the value where the scale graduation ends and the end location and width are defined.
Set to Double.NaN to bind to the value.
Gets or sets the end location of the ( is the start location).
Value interval to draw each mark or label.
If the Gauge uses logarithmic scale this interval must be specified
in logarithmic coordinates, such as (Log(Value2) - Log(Value1)).
Gets or sets the multiplier for the value interval (or the number of subintervals for logarithmic scale).
Gets or sets the logical distance between tick marks or labels.
Gets or sets the minimum displayed value interval if the scale is nonuniform.
If the Gauge uses logarithmic scale the value resolution must be specified
in logarithmic coordinates.
Gets or sets whether the From value should appear even if it doesn't conform with the specified interval.
Gets or sets whether the To value should appear even if it doesn't conform with the specified interval.
The sequence number for this marks (or labels) decorator. Displayed values will not appear
on the subsequent marks (or labels) with the same sequence number.
Set to -1 to ignore the order of this decorator.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the value multiplier when showing labels.
Allows to increase or decrease the displayed value by the specified multiplier.
Gets or sets the value offset when showing labels.
Allows to increase or decrease the displayed value by adding the specified amount.
Gets or sets the name of the font and color template.
Gets or sets the Color used to display text on labels.
Gets or sets the font used to display text in labels.
Logical value representing the scalable font size.
Set to Double.NaN to use the fixed font size.
Gets or sets the end font size of the labels ( is the start font size).
Standard or custom numeric format string for the labels.
Gets or sets the angle (in degrees) to rotate the label text.
Gets or sets the orthogonal alignment of the text labels.
Gets or sets the logical orthogonal offset of the text labels.
Gets or sets if the labels should be rotated depending on their values (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets whether the labels should be flipped if they appear inverted (for radial Gauges only).
used to display a sequence of tick marks on the Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of the decorator.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Logical value representing the length of each tick mark.
Gets or sets the end length of the tick marks ( is the start length).
Gets or sets the fixed angle (in degrees) to rotate the tick marks.
Gets or sets the orthogonal alignment of the tick marks.
Gets or sets the logical orthogonal offset of the tick marks.
Gets or sets if the tick marks should be rotated depending on their values (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets whether the shape of a tick mark is inverted.
Selects a shape from the set of predefined mark shapes.
Gets or sets the logical width of a tick mark.
Gets the custom shape for the tick marks.
Gets the properties of the tick marks border.
Adjusts the interior filling of tick marks.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Gets or sets the custom image for the tick marks.
Gets or sets the name of template for the collection.
Gets the collection of values with their associated images.
used to display a range on the Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of the decorator.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets whether the angle of a linear range should depend on the location difference.
Gets or sets the anti-aliasing method for the range filling.
Applying anti-aliasing to a bound range has significant performance impact.
Instead, you may draw a border of the same color as the background.
Gets or sets the range's logical width.
Gets or sets the end width of the ( is the start width).
Gets the properties of the border of this .
Adjusts the interior filling of this .
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
used to display a single label on the Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of the .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the angle relative to the Gauge pointer origin where the label should appear (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets the fraction-based position where this label should appear (for linear Gauges only).
Gets or sets the value associated with this label.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that gives the value associated with this label.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets whether the bound label should ignore the Pointer's sweep time.
Gets or sets the value multiplier when showing the label.
Allows to increase or decrease the displayed value by the specified multiplier.
Gets or sets the value offset when showing the label.
Allows to increase or decrease the displayed value by adding the specified amount.
The sequence number for this label. Displayed value will not appear
on the subsequent labels with the same sequence number.
Set to -1 to ignore the order of this label.
Standard or custom numeric format string for the label.
Gets or sets the text displayed in this label.
Gets or sets the name of the font and color template.
Gets or sets the Color used to display text label.
Gets or sets the font used to display text label.
Logical value representing the scalable font size.
Set to Double.NaN to use the fixed font size.
Gets or sets the angle (in degrees) to rotate the label text.
Gets or sets the orthogonal alignment of the text label.
Gets or sets the logical orthogonal offset of the text label.
Gets or sets if the label should be rotated depending on its angle (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets whether the label should be flipped if it appears inverted (for radial Gauges only).
used to display a single mark on the Gauge.
Initializes a new instance of the decorator.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the angle relative to the Gauge pointer origin where the tick mark should appear (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets the fraction-based position where the tick mark should appear (for linear Gauges only).
Gets or sets the value associated with this tick mark.
Gets or sets the index of a Pointer that gives the value associated with this tick mark.
Set to a large value to bind to the main Pointer.
Gets or sets whether the bound tick mark should ignore the Pointer's sweep time.
The sequence number for this tick mark. Displayed value will not appear
on the subsequent marks with the same sequence number.
Set to -1 to ignore the order of this tick mark.
Logical value representing the length of this tick mark.
Gets or sets the fixed angle (in degrees) to rotate this tick mark.
Gets or sets the orthogonal alignment of the tick mark.
Gets or sets the logical orthogonal offset of the tick mark.
Gets or sets if the tick mark should be rotated depending on its angle (for radial Gauges only).
Gets or sets whether the shape of a tick mark is inverted.
Selects a shape from the set of predefined mark shapes.
Gets or sets the logical width of a tick mark.
Gets the custom shape for this tick mark.
Gets the properties of the tick mark border.
Adjusts the interior filling of a tick mark.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Gets or sets the custom image for the tick mark.
Gets or sets the name of template for the collection.
Gets the collection of values with their associated images.
Aligment possibilities for a decorator (relative to the Gauge's axis).
The decorator is located inside the axis.
The decorator is located outside the axis.
The decorator is located centered in a the axis.
Specifies the style of lines drawn with a .
Hides the border.
Specifies a solid line.
Specifies a line consisting of dashes.
Specifies a line consisting of dots.
Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot.
Specifies a line consisting of a repeating pattern of dash-dot-dot.
The type of brush that is used to fill a Gauge element.
Don't fill the Gauge element.
Use a brush of a single color.
Use a brush with color gradient.
Use a brush with a hatch style.
Use an image to fill interior of a Gauge element.
Specifies how the source and given clipping regions can be combined.
The source region remains unchanged.
The source clipping region is replaced by the given region.
Two clipping regions are combined by taking their intersection.
Two clipping regions are combined by taking the union of both.
Two clipping regions are combined by taking only the areas enclosed by one or the other region, but not both.
Specifies that the source region is replaced by the result of the given region being removed from the source region.
Specifies that the source region is replaced by the result of the source region being removed from the given region.
Specifies the anti-aliasing mode for the internal filling of a .
The special anti-aliasing is not applied to the range's filling.
Applies the fast low-quality anti-aliasing to the range's filling.
Applies the slow but high-quality anti-aliasing to the range's filling.
Specifies the axis used to flip the image.
Specifies no flipping.
Specifies a horizontal flip.
Specifies a vertical flip.
Specifies a horizontal and vertical flip.
The set of possible gradient directions.
Specifies a gradient from left to right.
Specifies a gradient from top to bottom.
Specifies a gradient from upper left to lower right.
Specifies a gradient from upper right to lower left.
Specifies a gradient from center radially (inscribed ellipse).
Specifies a gradient from center radially (circumellipse).
Specifies a gradient from center to four corners.
Defines the type of a gradient falloff.
Creates an even linear blend from the starting color to the ending color.
Creates a gradient with a center color and a linear falloff to a single color on both ends.
Creates a gradient falloff based on a bell-shaped curve.
Specifies the different patterns available for the hatch brush.
A pattern of horizontal lines.
A pattern of vertical lines.
A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper left to lower right.
A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper right to lower left.
Specifies horizontal and vertical lines that cross.
A pattern of crisscross diagonal lines.
Specifies a 5-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 5:100.
Specifies a 10-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 10:100.
Specifies a 20-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 20:100.
Specifies a 25-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 25:100.
Specifies a 30-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 30:100.
Specifies a 40-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 40:100.
Specifies a 50-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 50:100.
Specifies a 60-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 60:100.
Specifies a 70-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 70:100.
Specifies a 75-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 75:100.
Specifies a 80-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 80:100.
Specifies a 90-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background
color is 90:100.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the right from top points to bottom
points and are spaced 50 percent closer together than ForwardDiagonal,
but are not antialiased.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom
points and are spaced 50 percent closer together than BackwardDiagonal,
but they are not antialiased.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the right from top points to bottom
points, are spaced 50 percent closer together than, and are twice the width
of ForwardDiagonal. This hatch pattern is not antialiased.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom
points, are spaced 50 percent closer together than BackwardDiagonal,
and are twice its width, but the lines are not antialiased.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the right from top points to bottom
points, have the same spacing as hatch style ForwardDiagonal,
and are triple its width, but are not antialiased.
Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom
points, have the same spacing as hatch style BackwardDiagonal,
and are triple its width, but are not antialiased.
Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Vertical.
Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Horizontal.
Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 75 percent closer together than
hatch style Vertical (or 25 percent closer together than LightVertical).
Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 75 percent closer together than
hatch style Horizontal (or 25 percent closer together than LightHorizontal).
Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than
Vertical and are twice its width.
Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than
Horizontal and are twice the width of Horizontal.
Specifies dashed diagonal lines, that slant to the right from top points
to bottom points.
Specifies dashed diagonal lines, that slant to the left from top points to
bottom points.
Specifies dashed horizontal lines.
Specifies dashed vertical lines.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of confetti.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of confetti, and is composed of
larger pieces than SmallConfetti.
Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of zigzags.
Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of tildes.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of layered bricks that slant to
the left from top points to bottom points.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of horizontally layered bricks.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a woven material.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a plaid material.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of divots.
Specifies horizontal and vertical lines, each of which is composed of dots,
that cross.
Specifies forward diagonal and backward diagonal lines, each of which is
composed of dots, that cross.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of diagonally layered shingles
that slant to the right from top points to bottom points.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a trellis.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of spheres laid adjacent to one
another.
Specifies horizontal and vertical lines that cross and are spaced 50 percent
closer together than hatch style Cross.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard with squares
that are twice the size of SmallCheckerBoard.
Specifies forward diagonal and backward diagonal lines that cross but are
not antialiased.
Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard placed diagonally.
The set of standard tick mark shapes.
Use the custom shape for tick marks.
Display a tick mark as rectangle.
Display a tick mark as circle or round rectangle.
Display a tick mark as triangle.
Specifies the orientation of a .
The gauge is oriented horizontally.
The gauge is oriented vertically.
The set of standard pointer shapes.
Use the custom shape for the pointer.
Display pointer as arrow.
Display pointer as arrow.
Display pointer as arrow.
Display pointer as rectangle.
Display pointer as circle or round rectangle.
Display a thumb for the linear pointer.
Display pointer as triangle.
Specifies the direction of an image's rotation and the axis used to flip the image.
Specifies no rotation and no flipping.
Specifies a 90-degree rotation without flipping.
Specifies a 180-degree rotation without flipping.
Specifies a 270-degree rotation without flipping.
Specifies no rotation followed by a horizontal flip.
Specifies a 90-degree rotation followed by a horizontal flip.
Specifies a 180-degree rotation followed by a horizontal flip.
Specifies a 270-degree rotation followed by a horizontal flip.
Specifies no rotation followed by a vertical flip.
Specifies a 90-degree rotation followed by a vertical flip.
Specifies a 180-degree rotation followed by a vertical flip.
Specifies a 270-degree rotation followed by a vertical flip.
Specifies no rotation followed by a horizontal and vertical flip.
Specifies a 90-degree rotation followed by a horizontal and vertical flip.
Specifies a 180-degree rotation followed by a horizontal and vertical flip.
Specifies a 270-degree rotation followed by a horizontal and vertical flip.
Specifies the blending mode for value Colors on a .
Display the same color till the next color position starts.
Display a linear falloff between the previous and the next color positions.
Display a smooth falloff between the previous and the next color positions.
Display a sharp falloff between the previous and the next color positions.
Specifies the position of the background image.
The image is left-aligned at the top across the control's client rectangle.
The image is tiled across the control's client rectangle.
The image is centered within the control's client rectangle.
The image is streched across the control's client rectangle.
The image is enlarged within the control's client rectangle.
Represents the method that handles the FormatLabel event.
The source of the event.
A FormatLabelEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the FormatLabel event.
Gets the object.
Gets the source value displayed in the label.
Gets the source value scaled by the ValueFactor and ValueOffset.
Gets or sets the text displayed in the label.
Represents the method that handles the PointerValueChanged event.
The source of the event.
A PointerValueChangedEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the PointerValueChanged event.
Gets the Gauge pointer which value has been changed.
The base class for shapes, such as or .
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
Loads a shape from an .
Saves a shape into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
Gets the owner Gauge element.
Gets or sets whether the shape can be hit-tested.
Gets or sets a name associated with the shape.
Gets or sets the fraction-based X position of the shape center.
Gets or sets the fraction-based Y position of the shape center.
Specifies the outer bounds for the shape.
Gets the collection of shapes that form the clipping region.
Gets or sets whether the shape is visible.
Draws a text caption.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This method is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the text displayed in this caption.
Gets or sets the name of the font and color template.
Gets or sets the Color used to display text caption.
Gets or sets the font used to display text caption.
Logical value representing the scalable font size.
Set to Double.NaN to use the fixed font size.
If set to True, unwrapped text reaching outside the formatting rectangle is allowed to show.
If set to True, text wrapping between lines when formatting within a rectangle is disabled.
Indicates how text is trimmed when it exceeds the edges of the layout rectangle.
Gets or sets whether the Text is displayed from right to left.
Gets or sets whether the Text is displayed in vertical direction.
Gets or sets text alignment information on the vertical plane.
Gets or sets the line alignment on the horizontal plane.
Gets or sets the rotation angle (pivot point is at the center of the caption).
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) width of the caption.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) height of the caption.
Draws a filled ellipse.
The base class for shapes that draw the border and fill the interior.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Gets the properties of the shape border.
Adjusts the interior filling of the shape.
Encapsulates properties of a color gradient.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) width of the ellipse.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) height of the ellipse.
Gets or sets the rotation angle (pivot point is at the center of the ellipse).
Draws an image.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
This method is for internal use only.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) width of the image.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) height of the image.
Gets or sets the rotation angle (pivot point is at the center of the image).
Gets or sets the name of the image template.
Gets or sets the axis used to flip the image.
Gets or sets the image.
Serializes the Image property.
Gets or sets whether the image aspect ratio should be maintained.
Gets or sets whether the predefined size of the image should not changed.
Allows to modify the image hue by the specified amount (between -180 and 180).
Allows to modify the image saturation by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Allows to modify the image lightness by the specified amount (between -100 and 100).
Gets or sets the opacity of the image between 0.0 (completely invisible) and 1.0 (opaque).
Draws a filled rectangle.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) width of the rectangle.
Gets or sets the logical (positive) or fraction-based (negative) height of the rectangle.
Gets or sets the slant angle of the left side (or both sides).
Gets or sets the slant angle of the right side.
Gets or sets the default radius for the rectangle corners.
Gets or sets the rotation angle (pivot point is at the center of the rectangle).
Gets or sets the radius for the left top corner.
Gets or sets the radius for the left bottom corner.
Gets or sets the radius for the right top corner.
Gets or sets the radius for the right bottom corner.
Draws a filled circular sector.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
Gets or sets the logical outer radius of the sector.
Gets or sets the logical radius of the sector center.
Gets or sets the logical offset of the inner circle (if the is less than 180 degrees).
Gets or sets the logical inner radius of the sector.
Gets or sets the radius for the sector corners.
Start angle for the . 0 is the topmost point of the circumference.
Sweep angle for the .
Draws a filled circular segment.
Initializes a new instance of the shape.
Gets or sets the logical radius of the circular segment.
Gets or sets the radius of the "chord" line.
Gets or sets the radius for the segment corners.
Start angle for the . 0 is the topmost point of the circumference.
Sweep angle for the .
StringTables
this class contains a single static method InitTables that populates the
tables used by the Localizer class.
Required designer variable.
Clean up any resources being used.
true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.
Required method for Designer support - do not modify
the contents of this method with the code editor.
Provides static methods that
should be called from the constructors of licensed classes.
Also provides a static method that can
be called to show the about box with product and licensing information.
Perform license validation. Call this method from the licensed object's
constructor to save a license key at design time, validate it at runtime,
and display a nag dialog if a valid license is not found.
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
Reference to the licensed object (not currently used).
A object that contains information about the license.
Check the ShouldNag property of the returned
to determine whether the licensed class should nag the user. This value is set
to true in situations where a valid license was not found but a nag dialog
could not be displayed. In these cases, the licensed class is supposed to nag
in some other way (with a watermark for example).
Perform license validation. Call this method from the licensed object's
constructor to save a license key at design time, validate it at runtime,
and display a nag dialog if a valid license is not found.
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
Reference to the licensed object (not currently used).
Whether the nag dialog should be displayed when a valid license is not found.
A object that contains information about the license.
This overload was created for use in WPF. It should be called in the control's constructor
in order to support license persistence correctly. But it should not show the nag dialog until the
control is fully loaded, or the VS designer may remain blank.
So the solution is this:
LicenseInfo _licInfo;
public LicensedControl()
{
// check license but don't nag yet
_licInfo = ProviderInfo.Validate(typeof(LicensedControl), this, false);
// perform licensing after control is fully loaded
Loaded += LicensedControl_Loaded;
}
void LicensedControl_Loaded(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e)
{
// nag after loading
if (_licInfo.ShouldNag)
{
ProviderInfo.ShowAboutBox(this);
}
}
Nag user by showing AboutBox with license information.
Show it only once per day per assembly.
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
object that contains information about the license.
Whether we're running at design or run time.
Version of Validate used by constructors that take runtime keys.
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
Reference to the licensed object.
Assembly that contains the owner licensed control.
Any valid C1 runtime key.
A with information about the runtime key.
This allows a licensed C1 class to create other C1 objects bypassing
license verification for the child objects.
For extra safety, we check that the owner object is defined in an assembly
the contains a 'C1ProductInfo' attribute.
Design time validation. Looks for a license in the registry and saves it in the
provided .
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
where the runtime key will be stored.
A with information about the license.
Call this method from application-type products (that always require a license to be
installed in the registry). In this case, the parameter
should be set to null.
Runtime validation.
Looks for a runtime key stored in the current application's resources.
Type of licensed object (use typeof() and not GetType()).
where the runtime key will be stored.
A with information about the license.
Shows the About Box for an instance of a C1 product.
Get the type whose assembly contains a 'C1ProductInfoAttribute'.
Instance of an object whose type is to be checked.
The type whose assembly contains a 'C1ProductInfoAttribute'
Contains information about a license stored in an application.
Initializes a new instance of a class.
Initializes a new instance of a class.
Gets or sets the status of this license (valid, expired, unlicensed).
Gets or sets the associated with this license.
Gets or sets the associated with this license.
Gets the number of evaluation days elapsed.
Returns -1 for valid licenses.
Gets the number of evaluation days still left.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the caller should
nag the user. This is the case when the component/control is
not licensed, but is not running in interactive mode. So we can't
show a dialog and the caller is supposed to nag some other way
(typically by adding watermarks to the UI or output).
Gets a value that determines whether the license found is valid.
Gets a value that determines whether the license found is expired.
Gets a value that determines whether the component is running under
localhost and therefore should not nag the user with alert dialogs.
Gets a value that determines whether the license found is valid.
Gets a value that determines whether the license found is expired.
Provides a version of GetSavedLicenseKey that doesn't require
special permissions.
The code was mostly copied from the .NET framework, but then changed
in a few places to require fewer permissions (assembly name, file io,
etc).
The main change is the use of a custom deserializer to read Hashtable
objects instead of the original BinaryFormatter, which requires
permissions.
Attribute used to specify the product name shown on the About Box.
Attribute used to attach licensing/product information to assemblies.
Attribute used to attach support information to assemblies.
C1DescriptionAttribute replaces the DescriptionAttribute
and uses the C1Localizer class to return the localized Attribute string
C1CategoryAttribute replaces the CategoryAttribute
and uses the C1Localizer class to return the localized Attribute string
Localization tables and methods for looking up localized strings.
Represents a license for a product (e.g. C1BarCode, C1Studio Enterprise).
Provides methods for:
- generating new license keys (administrative task)
- checking license key validity (used by installer and products)
- generating and checking runtime keys (used by products)
- installing/uninstalling licenses (used by installer)
The install/uninstall code requires elevated permissions, and is
used only by setups and utilities (not by controls). The code is
implemented in the ProductLicense.Installer.cs, which controls should
not include since it won't be useful to them.
When a product is sold, we send the user a license KEY. The user installs
a license on his machine by providing his name, his company name, and the
key.
The is a string in the following format:
AAQYYCC-XX-NNNNNN-DD-DZZZZZZ
Where:
AA: Product code (should match one of the products in the
product catalog (see ProductInformation.GetProductCatalog()).
Q: Quarter when the license key was issued (1, 2, or 3)
YY: Year when the license key was issued (e.g., 10 for 2010)
CC: Order code, two chars that indicate whether this is a
new sale, upgrade, renewal, special offer, etc.
XX: Hash code to ensure key validity.
NNNNNN: Unique serial number.
DDD: Vendor code, three chars
ZZZZZZ: Combination of random numbers for uniqueness and extra hash.
Represents the control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
OnLoad override.
At this point tree view raise all its events.
Processes call back command of C1ComboBox.
Command name
Command args
RaiseItemsRequested
SortItems with default object.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
// after sort test1 will be the first item.
comboBox.SortItems();
Sorts s with given object.
Custom IComparer object.
Handles the Init event of this control.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified
The object that receives the server control content.
Outputs server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object.
The System.Web.UI.HTmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
CreateMoreResultBox
Handlers the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for .
Returns a collection of instances.
Registers the script references for .
Returns a collection of instances with the required client-script blocks.
Find a by its property.
Text used to match the item.
The first matched item. If no match is found, null is returned.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text2"));
// the first item is found.
C1ComboBoxItem match = comboBox.FindItemByText("text1");
Find a by its property.
C1ComboBoxItem.Value used to match the item.
The first matched item. If no match is found, null is returned.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text1","value1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text2","value2"));
// the first item is found.
C1ComboBoxItem match = comboBox.FindItemByValue("value1");
Returns index of a by its property.
Text used to match the item.
Index of C1ComboBoxItem. If no match is found, -1 is returned.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text1","value1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text2","value2"));
// 1 is returned.
int index = comboBox.FindItemIndexByText("text2");
Returns index of a by its property.
Value used to match the item.
Index of C1ComboBoxItem. If no match is found, -1 is returned.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text1","value1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("text2","value2"));
// 0 is returned.
int index = comboBox.FindItemIndexByValue("value1");
Clears the current selection by unselecting all selected cells.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
// Clear added items.
comboBox.ClearSelection();
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved with the SaveViewState() method.
An object that represents the control state to restore.
Saves any state that was modified after the TrackViewState() method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
When overridden in a derived class, binds data from the data source to the control.
The list of data returned from a method call.
ICallbackEventHandler.GetCallbackResult implementation.
Call back result.
ICallbackEventHandler.RaiseCallbackEvent implementation.
A System.String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
IPostBackDataHandler.RaisePostDataChangedEvent implementation.
Notifies the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Processes postback data.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
AssignComboBoxProperties
Enables a server control to process an event raised when a form is posted to the server
A String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
string path = "c:\comboBox.xml";
// the comboBox is saved in comboBox.xml
comboBox.SaveLayout(path);
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Following code shows how to use this method.
// save comboBox properties to a MemoryStream object.
MemoryStream m = new MemoryStream();
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
comboBox.SaveLayout(m);
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
string path = "c:\comboBox.xml";
// the comboBox is saved in comboBox.xml
comboBox.SaveLayout(path);
// load from comboBox.xml
C1ComboBox comboBox2 = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox2.LoadLayout(path);
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Following code shows how to use this method.
// save comboBox properties to a MemoryStream object.
MemoryStream m = new MemoryStream();
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
comboBox.SaveLayout(m);
// load from stream.
C1ComboBox comboBox2 = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox2.LoadLayout(m);
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
string path = "c:\comboBox.xml";
// the comboBox is saved in comboBox.xml
comboBox.SaveLayout(path);
// load from comboBox.xml, only properties with Appearance category is loaded.
C1ComboBox comboBox2 = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox2.LoadLayout(path, LayoutType.Appearance);
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Following code shows how to use this method.
// save comboBox properties to a MemoryStream object.
MemoryStream m = new MemoryStream();
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
comboBox.SaveLayout(m);
// load from stream, only properties with Appearance category is loaded.
C1ComboBox comboBox2 = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox2.LoadLayout(m, LayoutType.Appearance);
Gets or sets the for .
]]>
Gets or sets a value determines whether to append bound items for .
]]>
Gets or sets a value determines whether supports auto complete feature.
]]>
Gets or sets a value determines the position of the drop-down list when it opens or pops up.
]]>
Gets or sets the time delay before auto completion starts (in milliseconds).
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether arbitrary text can be entered in the text box.
]]>
Returns a string array with embedded visual style names.
Gets or sets the character or string used to separate multiple selections from the drop-down list.
]]>
Gets or sets SelectionMode of this .
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a postback to the server automatically occurs when the user changes the selection.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether item select causes validation.
]]>
Gets or sets the columns.
The columns.
Gets or sets the ValidationGroup that belongs to.
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to show the Trigger button.
The Trigger button is the arrow in the that you click to expand the drop-down list.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the drop-down list is resizable.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether is enabled.
]]>
Gets or sets parent control enable state.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the text is set for the input field of during arrow key navigation.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the drop-down list for the should be closed on blur.
]]>
Gets or sets the to use when the drop-down list is expanding.
]]>
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when drop-down list is expanding.
]]>
Gets or sets the transition of the animation when drop-down list is expanding.
]]>
Gets or sets the drop-down list width (in pixels).
If the value is less than zero, the width of the C1ComboBox will be used.
]]>
Gets or sets the width of the drop-down list (in pixels).
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to enable callback to load s on demand.
]]>
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control.
Determines whether to enforce Window Collision Detection for the drop-down list.
]]>
Gets or sets a value determines whether to fetch more on scrolling to end.
]]>
Gets or sets the text to display if an error occurs during a call back to the server.
]]>
Gets or sets the to use when the drop-down list is collapsing.
]]>
Gets or sets the duration of the animation when the drop-down list is collapsing.
]]>
Gets or sets the transition of the animation when the drop-down list is collapsing.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to highlight the items when using template.
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether text matching should be case sensitive.
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether text is editable.
]]>
Gets a value indicating whether C1ComboBox uses an item template.
Gets children items of .
Gets or sets the text to display during a call back to the server.
]]>
Gets or sets the time delay before starting a call back to the server.
]]>
Offsets the normal positions of drop-down list items along the x-axis by the number specified.
]]>
Offsets the normal positions of drop-down list items along the y-axis by the number specified.
]]>
The client-side event fired when the loses focus.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the drop-down list is about to be closed.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the drop-down list is closed.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the drop-down list is about to be expanded.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the drop-down list is expanded.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the gains focus.
]]>
The client-side event fired after the request for items has completed.
]]>
The client-side event fired after the request for items has failed.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired before the items are requested server-side.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the specified key is pressed.
]]>
The name of the javascript function called after a is initialized.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired after the selected index of the has changed.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the selected index of the C1ComboBox is about to change.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the property is changed.
]]>
The client-side event that is fired when the Text entered in the exceeds the maximum length allowed.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to show the drop-down list when a document is loaded.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to show the "more" arrow button in drop-down list.
]]>
Determines whether the trigger button, or drop-down arrow, appears on the left or right of the .
]]>
Gets or sets the ZIndex for the C1ComboBox drop-down list, if needed.
The default value is 0, which allows the system to assign the ZIndex value for the drop-down list.
]]>
Gets or sets the text to show when the text box is empty.
]]>
Gets or sets whether this control is visible.
]]>
Gets or sets the FilterType used for .
]]>
Gets or sets the header template used for the drop-down list.
Template content
]]>
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to automatically filter the drop-down list on keypress.
]]>
Gets or sets the height of the drop-down list.
]]>
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets the items template used for .
Template content
]]>
Gets or sets the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the text box.
]]>
Gets or sets the SelectedIndex of .
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
// select the test2 item.
c.SelectedIndex = 1;
Gets or sets the SelectedIndices of .
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.SelectionMode = C1ComboBoxSelectionMode.Multiple;
ArrayList indicesToSelect = new ArrayList();
indicesToSelect.Add(0);
indicesToSelect.Add(1);
// select 2 items.
c.SelectedIndices = indicesToSelect;
Gets the SelectedItem of .
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.SelectedIndex = 1;
// item will refer to test2.
C1ComboBoxItem item = c.SelectedItem;
Gets the SelectedItems of .
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.SelectionMode = C1ComboBoxSelectionMode.Multiple;
ArrayList indicesToSelect = new ArrayList();
indicesToSelect.Add(0);
indicesToSelect.Add(1);
// select 2 items.
c.SelectedIndices = indicesToSelect;
C1ComboBoxItem[] items = new C1ComboBoxItem[2];
items = c.SelectedItems;
Gets or sets the footer template used for the drop-down list.
Template content
]]>
Gets or sets the tooltip for the .
]]>
Gets a value indicating whether C1ComboBox is multiple column.
true if this instance is multiple column; otherwise, false.
Determines whether the items in the C1ComboBoxItems list appear in ascending or descending order.
]]>
Gets or sets a value indicating Sort CaseSensitive.
]]>
Gets the footer control of the drop-down list C1ComboBox.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.DropDownFooter.Controls.Add(new TextBox());
Gets the footer control of the drop-down list C1ComboBox.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.DropDownHeader.Controls.Add(new TextBox());
Gets or sets the field in the data source from which to load text values.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.DataSource = data;
c.DataTextField = "textField";
c.DataValueField = "valueField";
c.DataBind();
Gets or sets the field in the data source from which to load item values.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.DataSource = data;
c.DataTextField = "textField";
c.DataValueField = "valueField";
c.DataBind();
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
Gets or sets VisualStyle name for C1ComboBox.
Gets or sets whether length of text in C1ComboBox exceeds the length defined in .
Client side visibility of C1ComboBox
Occurs after is created in data binding.
Occurs when is binding data.
Occurs when C1ComboBox requests data from client side.
Occurs when the SelectedIndex property has changed.
Occurs when the text in the C1ComboBox text box changes.
Occurs when the length of text in the C1ComboBox exceeds the .
Gets or sets text for .
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
C1ComboBoxItem item = new C1ComboBoxItem("test1");
item.Selected = true;
comboBox.Items.Add(item);
// txt is "test1";
string txt = comboBox.Text;
Gets or sets the C1ComboBox footer text.
The footer text.
Represents an item in the drop-down list.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Text.
Value.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxItem class.
text.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxItem class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxItem class.
Index of current item.
Related data item.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
An that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Removes this from collection.
Following code shows how to use this method.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
comboBox.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
// test2 will be removed from collection.
comboBox.Items[0].Remove();
Outputs server control content to a provided object and stores tracing information about the control if tracing is enabled.
The HTmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
RenderBeginTag
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Raises the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Specifies owner of this .
object.
IComparable.CompareTo implementation.
AssignProperties
Properties
Gets current image Url.
Gets or sets the template container.
The template container.
Gets custom attributes HashTable of .
This Hashtable could be used to store additional info.
Gets the column data.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a server control is rendered as UI on the page.
true if the control is visible on the page; otherwise false.
Determines whether the is enabled in the drop-down list.
Gets or sets the URL for the image to be used to show highlighted state.
Gets or sets the URL for the image used to show normal state.
Gets or sets the URL for the image to be used for disabled state.
Gets the index in collection.
Determines if the is a separator so that keyboard navigation ignores it.
Owner
Gets the parent .
Determines whether the is selected.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control. This property is used primarily by control developers.
Gets or sets value indicating if this item uses template
Gets or sets the text of the .
Gets or sets a tooltip for the current .
Gets or sets a value for this .
Key for C1ComboItem declared on aspx page.
Gets or sets the width of the in the drop-down list.
Gets or sets the height of the in the drop-down list.
This property is hidden.
Represents a collection of objects.
Initializes a new instance of the class..
Parent ComboBox.
Removes all s from the collection.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
// items are clear.
c.Items.Clear();
Adds a new to the end of the list.
Item to add.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
Inserts a at the specified position in the collection.
Position where the C1ComboBoxItem will be added. The value should be greater than or equal to 0.
instance.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Insert(0,new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
Removes the specified from the list.
to remove.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
C1ComboBoxItem item = new C1ComboBoxItem("test1")
c.Items.Add(item);
c.Items.Remove(item);
Removes the at the specified index from the list.
Index of to remove.
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.RemoveAt(0);
InternalClearSelection
Gets selected items.
Sort
Sort with default comparer.
CrateCollectionFromJson
list
Gets value that indicates if the collection is empty or not.
If collection is empty than it will be skipped during the serialization process.
C1ComboBox comboBox = new C1ComboBox();
bool b = comboBox.Items.IsEmpty;
// b == true;
Gets or sets the selected indices of .
C1ComboBox c = new C1ComboBox();
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test1"));
c.Items.Add(new C1ComboBoxItem("test2"));
c.SelectionMode = C1ComboBoxSelectionMode.Multiple;
ArrayList indicesToSelect = new ArrayList();
indicesToSelect.Add(0);
indicesToSelect.Add(1);
c.SelectedIndices = indicesToSelect;
Represents C1ComboBoxSerializer which will serialize C1ComboBox.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxSerializer class..
Object to serialize.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxSerializer class.
IComponentChangeService
Object to serialize.
Template container for C1ComboBox.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxTemplateContainer class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBoxTemplateContainer class.
Index of current item.
Related data item.
Parent ComboBox instance.
C1ComboBoxItem with this template container.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control.
Gets an object that is used in simplified data-binding operations.
Gets the index of the data item.
Gets the display order of the C1ComboBoxItem relative to the currently displayed C1ComboBoxItems.
Determines whether the items in the s list appear in ascending or descending order.
Descending.
Ascending.
Represents filtering options available.
Matches item if its text contains the filtering text.
Matches item only if its text starts with the filtering text.
Represents selection modes available.
Single Mode. Allows only one to be selected.
Multiple Mode. Allows multiple s to be selected.
Determines whether the trigger button, or drop-down arrow, appears on the left or right of the .
Sets the trigger button, or drop-down arrow, to appear on the left of the .
Sets the trigger button, or drop-down arrow, to appear on the right of the .
Determines the position of the drop-down list when it opens or pops up.
Absolute mode.
Center.
Top Left.
Top Right
Top Center.
Right Top.
Right Bottom.
Right Middle.
Bottom Left.
Bottom Right.
Bottom Center.
Left Top.
Left Bottom.
Left Middle.
Represents the method that will handle event.
The source of the event.
An that contains event data.
Represents the method that will handle an data binding events of .
Such as event and event.
The source of the event.
An that contains event data.
Represents the method that will handle event.
The source of the event.
An that contains event data.
Contains event data for data binding events.
Such as event and event.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ComboBox class.
related with this event
Gets the related with this event.
Contains event data for event and event.
Gets or sets the new value.
Gets or sets the old value.
Contains event data for event.
Gets or sets the text used to filter items.
Gets or sets the message that will be displayed after 'show more' arrow.
Gets or sets the number of client items.
Gets or sets a Boolean value indicating whether client side has rich the end of all items.
Represents C1ComboBox data bind column.
C1ComboColumnBase class.
This class inherits from WebControl and hides useless properties.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the Web server control.
The access key for quick navigation to the Web server control. The default value is , which indicates that this property is not set.
The specified access key is neither null, nor a single character string.
Gets or sets the tab index of the Web server control.
The tab index of the Web server control. The default is 0, which indicates that this property is not set.
The specified tab index is not between -32768 and 32767.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether themes apply to this control.
true to use themes; otherwise, false. The default is false.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the server control persists its view state, and the view state of any child controls it contains, to the requesting client.
true if the server control maintains its view state; otherwise false. The default is true.
Gets or sets the skin to apply to the control.
The name of the skin to apply to the control. The default is .
The skin specified in the property does not exist in the theme.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified . This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Gets or sets the type name of the column.
The header text.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is visible.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is enabled.
true if control is enabled; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets the static key of the column.
Gets or sets the header text of column.
The header text.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control. This property is used primarily by control developers.
One of the enumeration values.
Gets or sets the type name of the column.
The header text.
Gets or sets the header text of column.
Gets or sets the format string of the column.
Gets or sets the header text of column.
The header text.
Gets or sets the column template.
C1ComboCell class.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified . This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Gets or sets the value.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control. This property is used primarily by control developers.
One of the enumeration values.
Gets or sets the parent item.
The parent item.
Hides Visible property from user.
Cell will not support Visible property.
Hides Enabled property from user.
Cell will not support Enabled property.
Represents C1ComboCell collection.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The item.
Inserts an element into the at the specified index.
The zero-based index at which should be inserted.
The object to insert. The value can be null for reference types.
is less than zero.
-or-
is greater than .
Represents C1ComboColumn collection.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Froms the json.
The al.
C1EditorGroup
Name
HeaderText
CssClass
UpperID
ToolBars
C1EditorGroupCollection
Add C1EditorGroup to collection.
The specified object.
Remove C1EditorGroup from collection.
The specified C1EditorGroup object.
Remove C1EditorGroup from collection by key name.
The specified key.
Get C1EditorGroup by index of collection.
The specified index.
Return C1EditorGroup object.
Get C1EditorGroup by key of collection.
The specified key.
Return C1EditorGroup object.
C1EditorTabPage
Name
Text
Groups
C1EditorTabPageCollection
constructor
Add TabPage to collection.
The specified C1EditorTabPage object.
Remove TabPage from collection.
The specified C1EditorTabPage object.
Remove C1EditorTabPage by key name of collection.
The specified key.
Get C1EditorTabPage by index of collection.
The specified index.
Return C1EditorTabPage object.
Get C1EditorTabPage by key name of collection.
The specified key.
Return C1EditorTabPage object.
C1EditorToolbarCollection
Add toolbar to collection.
The specified C1ToolBar object.
Remove toolbar from collection.
The specified C1ToolBar object.
Remove C1ToolBar from collection by id.
Get C1ToolBar by index of collection.
The specified index.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get C1ToolBar by key of collection.
The specified key.
return C1ToolBar object.
Represents a C1FormDecorator in an ASP.NET Web page.
Creates a new instance of the C1FormDecorator class.
Override AddAttributesToRender method
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
SkinID
CssClass
ToolTip
Enabled
Width
Height
Get/Set the DecoratedControls enum of C1FormDecorator
Gets or sets the client id of a html element whose children will be decorated.
Path to visual styles.
VisualStyle name.
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Changed the type of control's tag.
Show Animation Effect.
Show Animation duration in milliseconds.
Show delay in milliseconds before tooltip start popups.
Default value is 100.
Specifies the transition for show animation.
Hide Animation Effect.
Hide Animation duration in milliseconds.
Hide delay in milliseconds before tooltip start popups.
Default value is 100.
Specifies the transition for Hide animation.
Get/Set the DecoratedControls enum of C1FormDecorator
None
CheckBox
RadioButton
TextBox
TextArea
Button
FieldSet
Label
H3H4H5
DropDownList
All
Gauge control for ASP.NET.
C1Gauge constructor.
Loads the contents of from an XML file.
Loads the contents of from a .
Loads the contents of from an .
Saves the contents of into an XML file.
Saves the contents of into an XML file.
Saves the contents of into a .
Saves the contents of into a .
Saves the contents of into an .
Loads a View of from an XML file.
Loads a View of from a .
Loads a View of from an .
Saves a View of into an XML file.
Saves a View of into an XML file.
Saves a View of into a .
Saves a View of into a .
Saves a View of into an .
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
This member is for internal use only.
Called before control initialization.
Determines whether the server control contains child controls. If it does not, it creates child controls.
Raises the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Render override.
Get script descriptors.
Get script references.
LoadPostData.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
RaisePostBackEvent.
When implemented by a class, loads the server control's previously saved view state to the control.
An that contains the saved view state values for the control.
Saves any state that was modified after the method was invoked.
An object that contains the current view state of the control; otherwise, if there is no view state associated with the control, null.
Causes the control to track changes to its view state so they can be stored in the object's property.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Load event.
The System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Internal RaisePostbackServerEvents.
GetVisualStyleCssClassName.
ICallbackEventHandler.GetCallbackResult implementation.
Call back result.
ICallbackEventHandler.RaiseCallbackEvent implementation.
A System.String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
Processes call back command of C1ComboBox.
Command name
Command args
Gets the response page name.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the gauge is updated without a page refresh.
Gets or sets the format string for error message.
Gets or sets the alternate text displayed in the control when the image is
unavailable. Browsers that support the ToolTips feature display this text as a ToolTip.
Gets or sets the location to a detailed description for the image.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the control generates an alternate text attribute for an empty string value.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate
to the Web server control.
Gets or sets the background image url for gauge control.
Gets or sets a value indicating the position of the background image.
Gets or sets a digital tag identifying this element's views.
Gets the collection of Gauges.
Gets the collection of shapes in the bottom layer (between the background and Gauges).
Gets the collection of shapes in the top layer (over everything).
Gets or sets the quality of text rendering.
Gets or sets whether antialiasing is used when drawing Gauge elements.
Gets or sets whether pixels are offset during rendering.
Encapsulates properties of the shadow.
Specifies the bounds of the Gauge container working area.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for text font and color.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Gets the collection of templates for the object.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
If this value is empty then visual style will be not rendered.
Default value is "ArcticFox".
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
Controls collection.
Gets a value that indicates whether the server control is saving changes to its view state.
true if the control is marked to save its state; otherwise, false.
Indicates the method by which the HTML image tag source URL is rendered.
For more information, see the ImageRenderMethod Property topic.
Indicates the method by which image data is transferred to the source page.
When a secondary URL is used to stream image data back to an <IMG> tag on the primary page,
it is necessary to transfer the guage data through either a session object, cache object, or a file.
Gets or sets the level of uniqueness of the ID transfer object.
When guage data is transferred from one page to another, IDs are created for the Session or Cache variables
or for a filename in order to render a guage image. This property determines whether a unique ID is created
each time the guage image is accessed (i.e. when the guage image is accessed by a single user),
or if the same ID is to be used for the duration of the application life (i.e. when the identical guage image
is accessed by multiple users or accessed repeatedly by a single user).
Note: The ImageIdGeneration property has no effect with the ImageRenderMethodEnum.File or ImageRenderMethodEnum.BinaryWrite.
Specifies a path for various render methods.
This property specifies a pathname. It has different applications for different properties and settings.
For more information, see ImageRenderMethod Property. Also refer to File-based Rendering Tutorials,
HTTPHandler-based Rendering Tutorials, and ASP Page-based Rendering Tutorials.
Specifies the absolute expiration time when the image expires from the session, cache, or file object.
Gets or sets the Image format to be used for the client side image.
Note that while this property accepts a .Net ImageFormat value, the only image formats available
to the C1Gauge programmer are gif, jpeg, and png.
Gets or sets the image quality created when the ImageFormat is set to jpeg.
This property accepts an integer from 0 to 100 which specifies the quality of the jpeg image file.
Gets or sets the interval between the time the image was last accessed and the time
when the image expires from the session, cache, or file object.
If this value is the equivalent of 5 minutes, the image expires and is removed from the transfer
object 5 minutes after it was last accessed.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the
property in the C1Gauge class.
Unique ID is created each time the chart image is accessed.
The same ID is to be used for the duration of the application life.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the
property
in the C1Gauge class.
C1Gauge will generate image files that can be referenced directly by an <IMG> tag.
The <IMG> tag will be generated and will reference the file specified by the ImageUri property.
If the ImageUri property is not specified, then a name for the temporary file will be generated
and the URL will reference the temporary file.
C1Gauge supports the IHTTPHandler interface and will generate an appropriately placed
<IMG> tag within the page that references its internal HTTPHandler to stream the image to the client.
C1Gauge will perform a binary write to its host page response stream directly,
without transferring data to another page. However, the binary image data will be the only data returned.
C1Gauge will utilize a secondary asp(x) page to stream the image data back to an imbedded <IMG>
tag on the primary page. If this option is selected, the chart will generate an appropriately placed <IMG>
tag within the page that hosts the chart. The positioning of the <IMG> tag will be in the same location as
shown on the Visual Studio design page, and <IMG> tag src attribute will reference the specified asp(x) page.
The path to the page will be that specified by the ImageUri property.
C1Gauge does nothing to render itself at runtime. All operations required for generating and placing
the chart image within the page are the responsibility of the programmer.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the
property in the C1WebChart class.
Image is transferred in a session object.
Image is transferred in a cache object.
Image is transferred in a file.
Image is not transferred.
Takes a string with a uri and maps it to a local file,
even if the string contains the protocol scheme and host.
Also performs some convenient tests and operations with
the result.
Http handler for gauge image rendering.
Gets a value indicating whether another request can use the System.Web.IHttpHandler instance.
Helper class for supplementary table used to build multicolumn headers..
Creates table to generate multicolumn headers..
Root node. An instance of or .
Collection of ending nodes (leaves) of the tree.
Determines if parent is visible.
Constructed table.
Table height is calculated as maximum size of the route in the tree (only visible items counted). Width
is number of leaves, both visible and invisible. Table is generated thus each leaf has corresponding column.
Determines required sizes of the table which is required to hold multicolumn headers and builds collection
of leaves. Leaf is either or with empty (containing no visible
items) collection.
Root node. An instance of or .
Determines if parent is visible.
Maximum deep.
Returning value does not count invisible leaves.
Also sets and properties of the nodes.
Provides access to the columns that are contained by a parent column.
Infrastructure.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Owner.
Infrastructure.
Adds the specified derived column object to the end of
the .
The derived column object to append to the
Gets the derived column object from the name specified.
Name of the column to search.
The derived column object with specified name.
A column is searched for in the tree of columns belonging to the collection.
Thrown when a column with the specified name can not be found.
Returns the index of the specified derived column object from the
collection.
The derived column object to search for in the .
The index position of the specified derived column object in the
. The default value is -1, which indicates that the specified
derived object is not found.
Inserts the specified derived column object into the collection at specified index.
The zero-based index at which should be inserted.
The derived column object to insert.
Removes the specified derived column object from the .
The derived column object to remove.
Deletes the column from the collection at the specified index.
The zero-based index of the element to remove.
Iterates trough the collection from the top to the bottom.
List iterator.
Creates a default instance of the type object that is identified by the provided index.
The index of the type to create from the ordered list of types that are returned by the method.
An object that represents an instance of a class that is derived from the class, according to the index provided.
Gets an array of types that the collection can contain.
An array of type objects that identify the types of objects that the collection can contain.
Performs additional processing after all items are removed from the collection.
Performs additional processing after an item is added to the collection.
The index in the collection that the object was inserted at.
The object that was inserted into the collection.
Performs additional processing after an item is removed from the collection.
The index in the collection that the object was removed from.
The object that was removed from the collection.
Instructs the specified object to record its complete state to view state, instead of recording only changed information.
The object to mark as changed since the last time that view state was loaded or saved.
Gets a derived column object from the
collection at the specified index.
In C#, this property is the indexer for the class.
The index of the derived object in the collection
to retrieve.
Provides access to columns contained in the grouping area.
Adds the specified derived column object to the end of
the .
The derived column object to append to the
Returns the index of the specified within the collection.
The to locate in the collection.
The zero-based index of the within the collection, or -1 if the is not in the collection.
Inserts the specified derived column object into the collection at the specified index.
The zero-based index at which should be inserted.
The derived column object to insert.
Removes the specified derived column object from the .
The derived column object to remove.
Performs additional custom processes when clearing the contents of the collection.
Performs additional processing after an item is removed from the collection.
The index in the collection that the object was removed from.
The object that was removed from the collection.
Indexer for this collection.
The index in the collection.
object at the specified index.
Represent serializer used by .
Constructor.
Overridden.
Overridden.
Class UpdateBinding.
Class UpdateBindingCollection.
Infrastructure.
Represents the C1GridView control.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
The key.
Binds the control to the data source.
Calling this method is the same as calling DataBind(false).
Binds the control to the specified data source.
Indicates whether control must keep the expanded/collapsed state of the groups
between postbacks or not.
The DataBind method can be used to maintain the expanded/collapsed state of grouped rows when the grid
is bound to its datasource. Passing in True to this method keeps the current expanded/collapsed state of
the grouped rows. Passing in False (the same as calling DataBind()) uses the initial state as set in the
property.
Deletes the record at the specified index from the data source.
The index of the row to delete.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
XML file to load.
Loads control layout properties from the stream.
Stream to load.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
XML file to load.
Layout types to load.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
Stream to load.
Layout types to load.
Processes post-back data from a server control.
Required. The key identifier for the control.
Required. The collection of all incoming name values.
True if the server control's state changes as a result of the post back; otherwise False.
Enables a server control to process an event raised when a form is posted to the server.
A String that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
Signals the server control object to notify the Microsoft ASP .NET application that the state of the
control has changed.
Raises the event.
An that contains the event data.
Reset the property.
Saves control layout properties to the specified file.
XML file to save.
Saves control layout properties to the specified stream.
Stream to save.
Updates the record at the specified row index using the field values of the row.
The index of the row to update.
Adds the HTML attributes and styles of a control to be rendered to
the specified output stream.
An that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Creates the default style for the control.
A that represents the style for the control.
Creates a object using the specified parameters.
The index of the row to create.
The index of the data source item to bind to the row.
One of the values.
One of the values.
A created using the specified parameters.
Creates the control hierarchy used to render the control.
An that contains the data source for the control.
True to indicate that the child controls are bound to data; otherwise, false.
Creates the object that contains the arguments that get passed to the data source for processing.
A that contains the arguments that get passed to the data source.
Gets the objects for the control.
An collection of objects.
Gets the objects for the control.
An collection that contains ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Initializes a row in the control.
A that represents the row to initialize.
An collection of objects that represent the column fields in the control.
Initializes the empty data row displayed when the grid contains no data.
A that represents the empty data row to initialize.
The number of columns the empty data row should span.
Initializes the pager row displayed when the paging feature is enabled.
A that represents the pager row to initialize.
The number of columns the pager row should span.
A that represents the data source.
Passes the event raised by a control within the container up the page's UI server control hierarchy.
The source of the event.
An that contains event data.
True to indicate that this method is passing an event raised by a control within the container up the page's UI server control hierarchy; otherwise, false.
Raises the event.
The source of the event.
An that contains the event data.
Raises the event.
An that contains the event data.
Sets the initialized state of the data-bound control before the control is loaded.
The that raised the event.
An that contains the event data.
Raises the event.
An that contains the event data.
Binds data from the data source to the control.
An that contains the data source.
Sets up the control hierarchy for the control.
The used to render the server control content on the client's browser.
Renders the Web server control content to the client's browser using the specified object.
The used to render the server control content on the client's browser.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Raises the event.
A that contains event data.
Restores the previously saved view state of the control.
An object that represents the view state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Saves end user changes in the data source.
Request ID.
Command name.
Command argument.
RequiresDataBindingOnPostBack.
Request ID.
Command name.
Command argument.
The result of the callback.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether column widths and row heights are automatically sized when scrolling or rows and columns have been fixed.
The default value is false.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether automatic sorting is enabled.
The default value is True.
Set this property to True to enable automatic sorting. To enable sorting you must also
set the to true.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether client editing is enabled.
The default value is False.
In client editing mode grid does not update underlying dataset automatically.
Developer should implement dataset update using
, and
event handlers.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether columns can be moved on the client.
The default value is False.
This property allows your end users to rearrange the order of the columns on the client.
This property only works if you set to False.
You should provide code in the event.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether columns can be sized on the client.
The default value is False.
This property allows column sizing on the client. For this property to work correctly you need
to set the width of the component to 0px and optionally set the width of each column using the
Property builder.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether keyboard navigation is enabled.
The default value is False.
When this property is turned on you can use keys such as arrows, PgDown, PgUp, Home, End or Tab for changing currency.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether custom paging is enabled.
The default value is False.
Set this property to True to enable custom paging.
Paging allows you to display the contents of the component in page segments.
To enable custom paging, set both the and AllowCustomPaging properties to True.
Next, provide code to handle the event. Create a data source that contains
the data to display on a single page and then use the method to bind the data to
the component.
Because only a segment of the data is loaded, you must set the property to the total number of items
in the component. This allows the control to determine the total number of pages
needed to display every item in the component. This property is normally
programmatically set once the total number of items in the component is determined.
When paging is enabled with the AllowCustomPaging property set to False, the
component assumes that the data source contains all the items to be displayed. The
component calculates the indexes of the items on the displayed page based on the page index, specified
by the property, and the number of items on a page, specified by the
property.
When the AllowCustomPaging property is set to True, the component assumes that
the data source only contains the items as determined by the property.
All items up to the number of items specified by the property are displayed.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether grouping is enabled.
The default value is False.
This property allows your end users to drag column headers into the grouping area of the grid.
This property only works if is set to False and
is True. You should provide code in the
event.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether paging is enabled.
The default value is False.
Set this property to True to display the contents of the component in page segments.
You should provide code to handle the event.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether sorting is enabled.
The default value is False.
Set this property to True to enable sorting.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether objects are generated and displayed automatically.
Set this property to True to automatically display and create objects.
The default value is True.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a field column with a Delete button for each data row is automatically added to a control.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a field column with an Edit button for each data row is automatically added to a control.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a field column with an Filter button for the filter row is automatically added to a control.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a field column with an Select button for each data row is automatically added to a control.
Gets a object that represents the bottom pager row in a control.
Gets or sets the URL for the background image of the component.
Use this property to specify the background image of the component.
If the image is smaller than the control, the image will tile to fill in the background.
Gets or sets the cell padding of the rendered table.
The default value is -1, which indicates that this property is not set.
This property controls the distance (in pixels) between the contents of a cell
and the cell's border.
Gets or sets the cell padding of the rendered table.
The default value is -1, which indicates that this property is not set.
This property controls the distance (in pixels) between the contents of a cell
and the cell's border.
Determines the actions that can be performed by the using callbacks mechanism.
Gets or sets the text to render in an HTML caption element in a control.
This property is provided to make the control more accessible to users of assistive technology devices.
Gets or sets the horizontal or vertical position of the HTML caption element in a control.
This property is provided to make the control more accessible to users of assistive technology devices.
Gets a collection of objects representing the columns of the control.
Gets or sets the control that will automatically generate the columns for
a System.Web.UI.WebControls.GridView control that uses ASP.NET Dynamic Data
features.
Gets or sets an array that contains the names of the primary key fields for the items displayed in a control.
Gets a collection of objects that represent the data key value of each row in a control.
Gets or sets the width for columns in scrollable grid where no width has been specified.
Gets or sets the height for rows in scrollable grid.
Gets or sets the index of the item to be edited.
The default value is -1, which indicates that no item in the component is being edited.
Gets or sets the user-defined content for the empty data row rendered when a control is bound to a data source that does not contain any records.
Gets or sets the text to display in the empty data row rendered when a control is bound to a data source that does not contain any records.
Gets or sets the text to display if an error occurs during a callback to the server.
Value can contains two placeholders: request id that thrown an error and error message.
The default value is "Request:{0} error. Message: {1}".
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is enabled.
True if control is enabled; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets value indicating whether filtering will be performed automatically or not.
One of the values.
The default value is .
Gets a object that represents the filter row in a control.
Gets the object that defines the filter behaviors of the column at client-side.
Gets a object that represents the footer row in a control.
Gets or sets the grid lines to be shown in the rendered table.
This property is used to specify the style of the grid lines.
Caption of the grouping area.
Returns the columns contained in a group.
A that contains a collection of objects representing
the grouped columns in the control.
Gets or sets the indentation of your group.
Gets a object that represents the header row in a control.
Gets an array of objects that represents the header rows in a control.
Determines the horizontal alignment of the control.
The default value is .
Gets a object that represents the top pager row in a control.
Determines if partial or full update of grid's HTML content will take place during callback.
The default value is true.
Partial rendering is used with callbacks. When enabled, server sends only necessary HTML code
portions to a client as a result of callback thus performing smart update. Partial rendering is
used for edit, update, cancel, select actions, group expanding and virtual scrolling. If for any reason you need full
update of HTML code, set this property to false.
Gets the total number of pages needed to display the items in the component.
Gets or sets the index of the current page.
This property determines the page being displayed when paging is enabled.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the properties of the pager buttons in a control.
Gets or sets the custom content for the pager row in a control.
Gets or sets the number of items to place on a single page.
The default value is 10.
The property must be set to True for this property have any effect.
Gets the object that defines the resizing behavior of the columns on client-side.
Gets a object that represents the row header in a control.
Gets or sets the name of the column to use as the column header for the control.
This property is provided to make the control more accessible to users of assistive technology devices.
The name of the column to use as the column header.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets a collection of objects representing the items in .
A that contains a collection of objects representing
the individual rows in the control.
Gets the scroll setting for the control.
The Height and Width properties of must be specified in order for the scrollbars to appear and scroll properly.
Gets the object that contains the data key value for the selected row in a control.
Gets or sets the index of the selected row.
The default value is -1. Set this property to -1 to deselect an item in the component.
Gets or sets a enumeration member that represents grid's client-side selection behaviour.
The default value is .
Gets or sets the data-key value for the persisted selected item in a System.Web.UI.WebControls.GridView control.
Gets a object that represents the selected item in a control.
This object can be used to access the properties of the selected item.
Gets the data key value of the selected row in a control.
Determines whether the header is displayed.
The default value is true.
Set this property to true to display the header.
Gets or sets value indicating whether filter row is visible or not.
Default value is false.
Determines whether the footer is displayed.
The default value is False.
Set this property to True to display the footer.
Gets or sets a value indicating how control handles the tab key in order to change currency.
The default value is .
Infrastructure.
Gets or sets a value indicating how control handles change of current row in client editing mode.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a control renders its header in an accessible format.
This property is provided to make the control more accessible to users of assistive technology devices.
Gets or sets the virtual number of items when custom paging is used.
This property is only used when the property is set to True.
Determines the number of rows to load from server when using virtual scrolling.
Should be greater than 0. The default value is 30.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
If this value is empty then visual style will be not rendered.
Default value is "ArcticFox".
Gets or sets the position of the wait image.
Default value is .
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of alternating data rows in a control.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the row selected for editing in a control.
Returns string array with embedded Visual Styles names.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the empty data row rendered when a control is bound to a data source that does not contain any records.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the filter row in a control.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the footer row in a control.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the footer section of the column.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the grouping area in a control.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the header row in a control.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the header section of the column.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the data rows in a control.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the items of the control.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the pager row in a control.
The represents the style properties for the paging section
of the .
This property is used to provide a custom style for the paging section of the control.
Gets a reference to the object that enables you to set the appearance of the selected row in a control.
Gets or sets the path to the visual style folder.
If true then control will use the VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly;
otherwise control will load the VisualStyle from disk.
Gets the HTML tag that is used to render the control.
Determines if data-only or full update of grid's HTML content will take place during callback.
The default value is false.
Data-only rendering is used with callbacks. When enabled, server sends only necessary data or HTML code
portions to a client as a result of callback thus performing smart update. Data-only rendering is
used for page, sort, delete, filter. If for any reason you need full or partial
update of HTML code, set this property to false.
Occurs in client editing mode when edits done by user should be persisted to underlying dataset.
Fires at the very beginning of the update procedure.
You can perform any actions preceding update here, for example, establish database connectivity.
Occurs when a column has been moved.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a column is moved, but before the handles the operation.
To cancel the action set the Cancel property of the object to true.
Occurs when the data is changed.
Occurs in client editing mode when edits done by user should be persisted to underlying dataset.
Fires at the very end of the update procedure.
You can perform finalization steps of update procedure here, for example, close database connection.
Occurs after filter expression is applied to the underlying 's
property.
Occurs when the preparation for filtering is started but before the
instance handles the filter operation.
To stop the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
Occurs when property of the class has been set to "Custom".
This allows the customization of aggregate cell contents for text displayed in the group header or footer.
Occurs when a column in the grouping area has been moved.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a column in the grouping area is moved, but before the handles the operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
Occurs when the or property of the
class has been set to "Custom". This allows one to customize the text displayed for the group header or footer.
Occurs when one of the pager buttons is clicked, but after the control handles the paging operation.
Occurs when one of the pager buttons is clicked, but before the control handles the paging operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when the Cancel button of a item in edit mode is clicked, but before the item exits edit mode.
To stop the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
Occurs when a button is clicked in a control.
Occurs when a row is created in a control.
Occurs when a row is bound to data in a control.
Occurs when the Delete button is clicked.
The event occurs only if the grid is bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when the Delete button is clicked, but before the instance handles the delete operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when the Edit button is clicked, but before the instance handles the operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a row's Select button is clicked, but after the control handles the select operation.
Occurs when a row's Select button is clicked, but before the control handles the select operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a row's Select button is clicked, but after the control handles the sorting operation.
Occurs when a row's Select button is clicked, but before the control handles the sorting operation.
To cancel the operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a row's Update button is clicked, but after the control handles the update operation.
The event occurs only if the grid is bound to a DataSource control.
Occurs when a row's Update button is clicked, but before the control handles the update operation.
To cancel the update operation set the Cancel property of the object to true.
You must implement this event if the grid is not bound to a DataSource control.
Get or sets the method to be called after cell editing is completed.
Get or sets the method to be called after cell is updated.
Get or sets the method to be called before a cell enters edit mode.
Get or sets the method to be called before cell is updated.
Get or sets the method to be called before currency is change.
Get or sets the method to be called after currency is changed.
Gets or sets the method to be called after column width is changed.
Gets or sets the method to be called after selection is changed.
Storage used for persisting elements of object state which can't be
serialized to JSON using .
Represents the properties of the paging controls in the control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Gets or sets the URL to an image to display for the First page button.
Gets or sets the text to display for the First page button.
Gets or sets the URL to an image to display for the Last page button.
Gets or sets the text to display for the Last page button.
Gets or sets the mode in which to display the pager controls in a control that supports pagination.
Gets or sets the URL to an image to display for the Next page button.
Gets or sets the text to display for the Next page button.
Gets or sets the number of Page buttons to display in the pager when the
property is set to the or value.
Gets or sets a value that specifies the location where the pager is displayed.
Gets or sets the URL to an image to display for the Previous page button.
Gets or sets the text to display for the Previous page button.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the paging controls are displayed in a control.
Occurs when a property of a object changes values.
Represents an individual row in a control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the object in the collection.
The index of the DataItem in the underlying DataSet.
The row type of the .
The state of the object.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the object in the collection.
The index of the DataItem in the underlying DataSet.
The row type of the .
The state of the object.
The custom style.
Creates the default style for the control.
A that represents the style for the control.
Passes the event raised by a control within the container up the page's UI server control hierarchy.
The source of the event.
An that contains event data.
True to indicate that this method is passing an event raised by a control within the container up the page's UI server control hierarchy; otherwise, false.
Renders the Web server control content to the client's browser using the specified object.
The used to render the server control content on the client's browser.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the auto sizes.
Default value is true.
Gets or sets the underlying data object to which the object is bound.
Use the DataItem property to access the properties of the underlying data object to which the
object is bound. The DataItem property is only available during and after the event of a control.
Gets the index of the in the underlying DataSet.
Gets the index of the object in the collection of a control.
Gets the row type of the object.
Gets the state of the object.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a row is fixed to the top of the grid when it is scrolled vertically.
The default value of this property is False.
For a scrollable grid, the enumeration's Header constant will have a default
value of True. This property can be set in either the or
event.
When the grid is in grouping mode, the entire group that contains a fixed row will be moved
to the top of the grid.
Represents a collection of objects in a control.
Copies all the items from this to the specified System.Array object,
starting at the specified index in the System.Array object
The one-dimensional Array.
The zero-based index in the at which copying begins.
Returns a System.Collections.IEnumerator implemented object that contains all objects in the .
An IEnumerator for the collection.
Gets or sets the at the specified index within the .
In C#, this property is the indexer for the class.
Gets the number of items in the .
Gets a value indicating whether access to the is synchronized (thread-safe).
Gets the object that can be used to synchronize access to the .
Represents the scrolling properties of the control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Gets or sets if scroll bars should be displayed.
The default value is .
Gets or sets if horizontal, vertical, or both scroll bars should be displayed
The default value is .
The property of the object must be set to
for scroll bars to be visible.
GridUpdateBindingCollection contains objects specifying bindings used in method.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Adds the specified element to the end of the collection.
The object to add.
Copies content from the specified object.
The to copy content from.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Gets an object from the collection at the specified index.
In C#, this property is the indexer for the class.
Contain that allows organizing instances into
hierarchical structure. Used to create multilevel column headers.
This is the base class for bands and all columns.
Base class to support view state management.
Constructor.
Constructor.
Sets the state of the object as well as the
property of each of the objects contained by it.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Gets a value indicating whether state changes are being tracked.
Manages the view state.
Infrastructure.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Fills the specified object with values from the specified object.
The object that contains the values to retrieve.
A used to store the values of the specified cell.
One of the values.
One of the values.
True to include the values of read-only fields; otherwise, false.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Helper method called by control to set up the specified object.
The to set up.
The zero-based index of the column.
Row.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Helper method called by control to set up the specified object.
The to set up.
The zero-based index of the column.
Creates an empty -derived object.
An empty -derived object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Performs basic initialization.
Initializes the specified object.
Cell.
Raises the event.
Marks the state of the object as having been changed.
Gets a value that is used as a default width for a column if scrolling is enabled and
column's width is not explicitly set.
Default column width in scrolling mode.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets text that is rendered as the abbr attribute of the column's header cell.
Enables or disables autosize functionality for particular column.
Default value is true.
Determines whether column can be moved on the client.
The default value is True.
Determines whether columns can be sized on the client.
The default value is True.
Gets a string identifying CSOM type of an object.
Gets the style of any Web server controls contained by the object.
Determines whether a column is fixed to the left of the grid when it is scrolled horizontally.
The default value of this property is false. When this property is set to true for a column,
all columns to the left are also fixed. This property is usually used with the
property.
This property is ignored under group mode.
If child column of some is fixed then the top
and right-most column of the root contained current column will be fixed.
Gets the style properties of the column footer.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the footer section of the column.
Gets or sets the text of the footer.
Gets or sets the location of the header image.
Gets the style properties of the column header.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the header section of the column.
Gets or sets the header text.
Gets the style properties of the item.
This property is used to provide a custom style for items of the component.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the column is visible within the displayed area of the control.
True if the column is visible in the component; otherwise, False.
The default value is True.
Gets a value indicating whether a control is being used on a design surface.
Gets column's owner.
Storage used for persisting elements of object state which can't be
serialized to JSON using .
Compares columns by their OriginalTraverseIndex value.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Marks the state of the object as having been changed.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets the style properties to be merged with of the child columns.
Gets the style properties to be merged with of the child columns.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the filter section of the child columns.
Gets the style properties to be merged with of the child columns.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the footer section of the child columns.
Gets the style properties to be merged with of the child columns.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the header section of the child columns.
Gets the style properties to be merged with of the child columns.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the items of the child columns.
Gets a collection of objects representing the columns of the class.
Base class for all Button based columns.
This is the base class for all columns.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Marks the state of the object as having been changed.
Initializes the specified object.
Cell.
Helper method called by control to set up the specified object.
The to set up.
The zero-based index of the column.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Used to prevent client-side grouping of a column in a grouped grid.
When this property is set to True (default), you can drag columns to the grouping area.
Gets a object that determines whether a column should be grouped on
and how the group header and footer rows should be formatted and displayed.
Causes the grid to calculate aggregate values on the column and place them in the group header and footer rows. If the grid does not contain any groups, setting the Aggregate property has no effect.
One of the values. The default value is .
The aggregate value displayed in the group header/footer rows is formatted using the column's
property, except for Counts which are
displayed as integers without decimals.
Determines whether rows are merged.
One of the values.
The default value is .
Gets the direction of the sort.
One of the values. The default value is .
This property provides a convenient method of tracking the column sort state when the grid is sorted.
Gets or sets the name of the field or expression to pass to the OnSortCommand method when a column is
selected for sorting.
This property does not bind the column to a field in data source. To bind a column to a field,
see the documentation for the specific column type.
Infrastructure. Do not use.
Storage used for persisting elements of object state which can't be
serialized to JSON using .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Creates and returns the control that will be contained in the cells of column, based on
parameters and value.
Row index.
Command name.
Text.
Indicates if validation is needed.
Validation group.
Image URL.
Indicates if callback should be performed.
Control that will be placed to the cells of a column.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether validation is performed when a button in a column is clicked.
True to perform validation when a button in a column is clicked, otherwise false.
The default value is false.
Gets or sets the type of the button in the column.
One of the values. The default value is .
This property is used to specify whether buttons in the column display as push buttons or hyperlinks.
Gets or sets the name of the group of validation controls to validate when a button in a column is clicked.
The name of the validation group to validate when a button in a column is clicked.
The default value is an empty string.
A C1BoundField is bound to a field in a data source.
Inherits from .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Fills the specified object with values from the specified object.
The object that contains the values to retrieve.
A used to store the values of the specified cell.
One of the values.
One of the values.
True to include the values of read-only fields; otherwise, false.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Retrieves the value used for a field's value when rendering the object in a designer.
One of the values.
The value to display in the designer as the field's value.
Initializes the object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Initializes the specified object.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
Formats the specified field value for a cell in the object.
The field value to format.
True to encode the value; otherwise, false.
The field value converted to the format specified by.
Gets value of the filter formatted according .
Value of the filter formatted according .
Retrieves the value of the field bound to the object.
The container for the field value.
The value of the field bound to the .
Marks the state of the object as having been changed.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Binds the value of a field to the object.
The source of the event.
An that contains the event data.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the formatting string specified by the
property is applied to field values when the data-bound control that contains the object is in edit mode.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether empty string ("") values are converted to null when the field values are retrieved from the data source.
Gets or sets the name of the field in the database table to which a grid column is bound.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the display format for items in the column.
This property is used to provide a custom format for the items in the column.
The data format string consists of two parts, separated by a colon, in the form {A:Bxx}.
For example, the formatting string, {0:D2}, would format the cell to display a number with
two decimal places.
Note: The entire string must be enclosed in curly braces to denote that it is a format string and
not a literal string. Any text outside the curly braces is displayed as literal text.
The value before the colon (A in the general example) specifies the parameter index in a zero-based
list of parameters.
Note: This value can only be set to 0 because there is only one value in each cell.
The character after the colon (B in the general example) specifies the format to display the value in.
The following table lists the common formats.
- C - Displays numeric values in currency format.
- D - Displays numeric values in decimal format.
- E - Displays numeric values in scientific (exponential) format.
- F - Displays numeric values in fixed format.
- G - Displays numeric values in general format.
- N - Displays numeric values in number format.
- X - Displays numeric values in hexadecimal format.
Note: The format character is not case-sensitive, except for X, which displays the hexadecimal
characters in the case specified.
The value after the format character (xx in the general example) specifies the number of
significant digits or decimal places to display the value in.
Gets or sets value that will be used as filter operator when the property
is equal to the value.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
The string can be any literal string and can contain two placeholders:
name and current value.
"[{0}] LIKE '{1}*'"
Gets or sets filter operator used for filtering.
One of the values.
The default value is .
Gets the style properties of the filter item.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the filter item of the control.
Gets or sets a value of the currently applied filter.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
When filtering is done this property is automatically updated with the value inputted by user
to edit box of current column in filter row.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether field values are HTML-encoded before they are displayed in a object.
True if field values are HTML-encoded before they are displayed in a object; otherwise, false.
The default value is true.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether formatted text should be HTML encoded when it is displayed.
True if the text should be HTML-encoded; otherwise, false. The default value is true.
Gets or sets the caption displayed for a field when the field's value is null.
The caption displayed for a field when the field's value is null.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the object that implements the IDictionary interface used for textual substitution.
Determines whether the items in the bound column can be edited.
Gets or sets value indicating whether filter text box will be shown in the filter row of the
control or not.
The default value is true.
Gets the filter control object.
Gets the filter control's client ID which will be generated by ASP.NET automatically.
A C1ButtonField displays a command button for each item.
Inherits from .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Formats the specified field value for a cell in the object.
The field value to format.
The field value converted to the format specified by the property.
Initializes the object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets the command associated with the button.
Gets or sets the field name from a data source to bind to the .
Gets or sets the field name from a data source to bind to the .
Gets or sets the image to display for each button in the object.
Gets or sets the static caption that is displayed for each button in the object.
Represents a Boolean column that is displayed as a check box in a control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Fills the specified object with values from the specified object.
The object that contains the values to retrieve.
A used to store the values of the specified cell.
One of the values.
One of the values.
True to include the values of read-only fields; otherwise, false.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Retrieves the value used for a field's value when rendering the object in a designer.
One of the values.
The value to display in the designer as the field's value.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Binds the value of a field to the object.
The source of the event.
An that contains the event data.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Gets or sets the name of the field in the database table to which a grid column is bound.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
An empty string in all cases.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
An empty string in all cases.
Gets or sets the caption to display next to each check box in a .
A special column used to display command buttons that perform delete, edit, select or filter operations.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether validation is performed when a button in a column is clicked.
True to perform validation when a button in a column is clicked, otherwise false.
The default value is true.
Gets or sets the URL to the Cancel button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Cancel button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the Cancel button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Cancel button in a .
The default value is "Cancel".
Gets or sets the URL to the Delete button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Delete button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the Delete button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Delete button in a field.
The default value is "Delete".
Gets or sets the URL to the Edit button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Edit button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the Edit button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Edit button in a .
The default value is "Edit".
Gets or sets the Filter button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Filter button in a .
The default value is "Filter".
Gets or sets the URL to the Filter button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Filter button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the URL to the Select button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Select button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the Select button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Select button in a .
The default value is "Select".
Gets or sets the URL to the Update button image displayed in a field.
The URL to an image to display for the Update button in a .
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the Update button caption displayed in a field.
The caption for the Update button in a .
The default value is "Update".
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Cancel button is displayed in a column.
True to display a Cancel button in a ; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Delete button is displayed in a column.
True to display a Delete button in a ; otherwise, false. The default is false.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Edit button is displayed in a column.
True to display a Edit button in a ; otherwise, false. The default value is false.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Filter button is displayed in a column.
True to display a Filter button in a ; otherwise, false. The default value is false.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether a Select button is displayed in a column.
True to display a Select button in a ; otherwise, false. The default value is false.
A C1HyperLinkField displays each item as a hyperlink.
Inherits from .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Formats the navigation URL using the format string specified by the property.
An array of values to combine with the format string.
Formats the caption text using the format string specified by the property.
The text value to format.
The formatted text value.
Initializes the object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets the field from a data source to bind to the URL of the hyperlinks in the
.
The DataNavigateUrlField and properties cannot both be set at the same time.
If both properties are set, the DataNavigateUrlField property takes precedence
This property is obsoleted. Please use DataNavigateUrlFields property instead.
Gets or sets the names of the fields from the data source used to construct the URLs for the
hyperlinks in the .
If the DataNavigateUrlFields and the properties are both set, the DataNavigateUrlFields property takes precedence.
An array containing the names of the fields from the data source used to construct the URLs for the
hyperlinks in the .
The default is an empty array, indicating that DataNavigateUrlFields is not set.
Gets or sets the display format for the URL of the hyperlinks in the
when the URL is data-bound to a field in a data source.
The specified format is only applied to the URL when the URL is data-bound to a field in a data source.
Specify the fields to bind to the URL of the hyperlinks in the column by setting the
property.
Gets or sets the field to bind to the text of the hyperlink.
The DataTextField and properties cannot both be set at the same time.
If both properties are set, the DataTextField property takes precedence.
Gets or sets the display format for the text caption of the hyperlinks in the C1HyperLinkField column.
The specified format is applied to the text caption only when the text caption is data bound to a field in
a data source. Specify the field to bind to the text caption of the hyperlinks in the column by setting
the property.
Gets or sets the URL when a hyperlink is clicked.
The and NavigateUrl properties cannot both be set at the same time.
If both properties are set, the property takes precedence.
Gets or sets the window or frame where content appears when a hyperlink is clicked.
If this property is not set, the browser or window with focus refreshes when a hyperlink in the column is clicked.
Gets or sets the text for the hyperlink.
The and Text properties cannot both be set at the same time.
If both properties are set, the property takes precedence.
Represents a column that is displayed as an image in a control.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Initializes the object.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Fills the specified object with values from the specified object.
The object that contains the values to retrieve.
A used to store the values of the specified cell.
One of the values.
One of the values.
True to include the values of read-only fields; otherwise, false.
Applies the format specified by the property to a field value.
The field value to format.
The formatted value.
Applies the format specified by the property to the
alternate text value contained in the specified object.
The object that contains the alternate text value to format.
The formatted value.
Retrieves the value of the field bound to the object.
The object that contains the field value.
The name of the field for which to retrieve the value.
A , passed by reference, that
represents the properties of the field.
The value of the specified field.
Retrieves the value used for a field's value when rendering the object in a designer.
One of the values.
The value to display in the designer as the field's value.
Binds the value of a field to the object.
The source of the event.
An that contains the event data.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets the alternate text displayed for an image in the object.
The alternate text for an image displayed in the object.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether empty string ("") values are converted to null when the field
values are returned from the data source.
True if empty values should be converted to null; otherwise, false.
The default value is true.
Gets or sets the name of the column from the data source that contains the values to bind to the
property of each image in an object.
The name of the field to bind the property of each image in an
object.
This property is obsoleted. Please use property instead.
Gets or sets the name of the column from the data source that contains the values to bind to the
property of each image in an object.
The name of the field to bind the property of each image in an
object.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the format in which the alternate text for each image in an
object is rendered.
A string that specifies the format in which the alternate text for each image in an
object is rendered.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that now special formatting is applied to the
alternate text.
Gets or sets the name of the column from the data source that contains the values to bind to the
property of each image in an
object.
The name of the column to bind to the property
of each image in an object.
This property is obsoleted. Please use property instead.
Gets or sets the name of the column from the data source that contains the values to bind to the
property of each image in an
object.
The name of the column to bind to the property
of each image in an object.
Gets or sets the string that specifies the format in which the URL for each image in an
object is rendered.
A string that specifies the format in which the URL for each image in an
object is rendered. The default value is the empty string ("") , which indicates that no special
formatting is applied to the URLs.
Gets or sets the text to display in an object when the value
of the field specified by the property is null.
The text to display when the value of a column is null.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets the URL to an alternate image displayed in an object when the
value of the field specified by the property is null.
The URL to an alternate image displayed when the value of a column is null.
The default value is an empty string (""), which indicates that this property is not set.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the values of the column specified by the
property can be modified in edit mode.
True to indicate that the column values cannot be modified in edit mode; otherwise, false.
The default value is false.
Class that represents the row header column in a control.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Gets a value that is used as a default width for a column if scrolling is enabled and
column's width is not explicitly set.
Default column width in scrolling mode.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Helper method called by control to set up the specified object.
The to set up.
The zero-based index of the column.
Row.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Overrides the property.
This property is not supported by the class.
False in all cases.
Gets the style properties of the column footer.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the footer section of the column.
Gets the style properties of the column header.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the header section of the column.
Gets the style properties of the item.
This property is used to provide a custom style for the items of the component.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the column is visible within the displayed area of the control.
True if the column is visible in the control; otherwise, False.
The default value is false.
A C1TemplateField displays each item in the column following a specified template.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Fills the specified object with values from the specified object.
The object that contains the values to retrieve.
A used to store the values of the specified cell.
One of the values.
One of the values.
True to include the values of read-only fields; otherwise, false.
Creates an empty object.
An empty object.
Copies properties from the specified object.
The to copy the properties from.
Initializes the specified object to the specified row type and row state.
The to initialize.
The zero-based index of the column.
One of the values.
One of the values.
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Restores the previously saved state of the object from JSON.
An object that represents the object state to restore.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the value that the object is bound
to should be converted to null if it is Empty.
True if the value that the is bound to should be converted to null
when it is empty; otherwise, false. The default value is true.
Gets or sets the template for displaying the alternating items in a object.
Gets or sets the template to be used when editing an item.
Gets or sets the template used to show the footer of a .
Gets or sets the template used to show the header of a .
Gets or sets the template used to show an item in a .
Returns the collection of objects specifying bindings used
in the method.
Gets or sets the FilterValue property in order to execute filtering for the specified column.
Gets or sets the FilterOperator property in order to execute filtering for the specified column.
This method analyzes the data source and gets the appropriate enumerator for it.
IEnumerable interface for iterating through data.
Gets metadata information for columns in the data source.
ColumnInfoCollection, containing metainformation about data source.
Provides information about columns.
Creates ColumnInfo from PropertyDescriptor
PropertyDescriptor
Creates ColumnInfo from PropertyInfo
PropertyInfo
Creates ColumnInfo from PropertyInfo
PropertyInfo
Type of the column
Name of the column.
Collection of ColumnInfo objects
Adds ColumnInfo to collection
A object to add.
Removes ColumnInfo from collection
Index of the object to remove.
Indexer on ColumnInfo
This is an empty data source, which can be used in the PrepareControlHierarchy method in
ASP.NET server controls
This data source helps initialize child controls in two cases:
when they retrieve data from data source and when they do not have data.
Constructor.
The number of objects in the collection.
Returns a System.Collections.IEnumerator implemented object that contains all objects in the .
An IEnumerator for the collection.
Copies all the items from this to the specified System.Array object,
starting at the specified index in the System.Array object
The one-dimensional Array.
The zero-based index in at which copying begins.
Gets the number of objects in the collection.
Returns whether or not a collection is read-only.
Gets a value indicating whether access to the is synchronized (thread-safe).
Gets the object that can be used to synchronize access to the .
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property
in the class.
No aggregate is calculated or displayed.
Count of non-empty values.
Sum of numerical values.
Average of the numerical values.
Minimum value (numerical, string, or date).
Maximum value (numerical, string, or date).
Standard deviation (using formula for Sample, n-1).
Standard deviation (using formula for Population, n).
Variance (using formula for Sample, n-1).
Variance (using formula for Population, n).
Custom value.
Percent value.
Use the members of this enumeration to determine the actions that can
be performed by the control using callbacks.
All actions are performed via postback.
Column moving is performed via callbacks.
Editing is performed via callbacks.
Group expanding\collapsing is performed via callbacks.
Paging is performed via callbacks.
Row selection is performed via callbacks.
Sorting is performed via callbacks.
Filtering is performed via callbacks.
Client editing is performed via callbacks.
All actions are performed via callbacks.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property
of a control.
Filtering is performed automatically.
Filtering is performed manually.
The FilterOperator enumerator.
NoFilter item.
Contains item.
NotContain item.
BeginsWith item.
EndsWith item.
Equals item.
NotEqual item.
Greater item.
Less item.
GreaterOrEqual item.
LessOrEqual item.
IsEmpty item.
NotIsEmpty item.
IsNull item.
NotIsNull item.
Custom item.
Use the members of this enumeration to determine the action that raised the
and the events.
Columns were rearranged within the grouping area.
Columns were moved from the grid to the grouping area.
Columns were moved from the grouping area to the grid.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property in
the class.
Disables grouping for the column.
Inserts header rows.
Inserts footer rows.
Inserts header and footer rows.
Specifies the state of a row in the control.
Indicates that the data control row is in a normal state. The Normal state is mutually exclusive with other states except the Alternate state.
Indicates that the data control row is an alternate row.
Indicates that the row has been selected by the user.
Indicates that the row is in an edit state, often the result of clicking an edit button for the row. Typically, the Edit and Insert states are mutually exclusive.
Indicates that the row is a new row, often the result of clicking an insert button to add a new row. Typically, the Insert and Edit states are mutually exclusive.
Specifies the function of a row in the control.
A header row of a data control. Header rows cannot be data-bound.
A footer row of a data control. Footer rows cannot be data-bound.
A data row of a data control. Only DataRow rows can be data-bound.
A row separator. Row separators cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays page buttons or a pager control. Pager rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays page buttons or a pager control. Pager rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays the grouped header. Group header rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays the grouped footer. Group footer rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays the grouped column. Group column rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays the grouping area. Group area rows cannot be data-bound.
A row that displays the filter bar. Filter rows cannot be data-bound.
Specifies the scroll mode.
Scroll bars are turned off.
Scroll bars are turned on.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property in
the class.
No sorting.
Sort from smallest to largest. For example, A to Z or 1 to 9.
Sort from largest to smallest. For example, Z to A or 9 to 1.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property
in the class.
Disables collapsing and expanding.
Groups are initially collapsed.
Groups are initially expanded.
Use the members of this enumeration to set the value of the property in the
derived column object.
No row merging.
Allows row with identical text to merge.
Keeps rows with identical text from merging if rows in the previous column are merged.
Specifies the position of the element.
Auto.
TopLeft.
TopCenter.
TopRight.
MiddleLeft.
Center.
MiddleRight.
BottomLeft.
BottomCenter.
BottomRight.
Specifies the tab navigation behaviour (client-side).
Currency is moving between focusable controls only.
Currency is moving between grid cells.
Specifies the behaviour of callback action.
Transfer all html to client side when call back.(including ColMove/GroupColMove)
Only transfer partial html to client side when call back.(including Cancel/Edit/Grp/Select/Update)
Only transfer data to client side when call back.(including Page/Sort/Delete/Filter)
Specifies client-side selection behaviour of the .
Selection is turned off.
Only a single cell can be selected at the same time.
Only a single column can be selected at the same time.
Only a single row can be selected at the same time.
Only a single range of cells can be selected at the same time.
It is possible to select more than one row at the same time using mouse, ctrl and shift keys.
It is possible to select more than one row at the same time using mouse, ctrl and shift keys.
It is possible to select more than one cells range at the same time using mouse, ctrl and shift keys.
Infrastructure.
Specifies client-side editing behaviour of the when current row is changed in client editing mode.
Edits done in a row are sent to server automatically when current row is changed.
Edits done in a row are not automatically sent. Developer should explicitly call CSOM Update() method to force
sending the changes.
Represents the method that handles the event of a control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Represents the method that handles the event of a control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Represents the method that will handle the event of a
control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the row containing the cancel button.
Gets the index of the row containing the Cancel button that raised the event.
Represents the method that will handle the
event of the .
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the collection.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the collection.
Represents the method that will handle the
event of the .
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the collection.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the collection.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The source of the command.
A that contains the event data.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
A that contains the command source.
The source of the command.
A that contains the event data.
Gets the that contains the command source.
Gets the source of the command.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the row being deleted.
Gets a dictionary of field name/value pairs that represent the primary key of the item to delete.
Gets the index of the row being deleted.
Gets a dictionary of the non-key field name/value pairs in the item to delete.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Number of rows affected by the delete operation.
Exception that was raised during the delete operation.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Number of rows affected by the delete operation.
Exception that was raised during the delete operation.
An ordered dictionary of key field name/value pairs for the deleted record.
A dictionary of the non-key field name/value pairs for the deleted record.
Gets the number of rows affected by the delete operation.
Gets the exception that was raised during the delete operation.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether an exception that was raised during the delete operation was handled
in the event handler.
Gets an ordered dictionary of key field name/value pairs for the deleted record.
Gets a dictionary of the non-key field name/value pairs for the deleted record.
Represents the method that handles the event of a control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the row being edited.
Gets or sets the index of the row being edited.
Represents the method that handles the event of a control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Gets a dictionary containing field name / filter value pairs in the filter row.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the .
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the or
collection. Which collection is specified by the .
One of the values that specified the action that generated the event.
One of the values that specified the action that generated the event.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the .
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the .
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The object being repositioned.
Index of the new position within the or
collection. Which collection is specified by the .
One of the values that specified the action that generated the event.
One of the values that specified the action that generated the event.
Represents the method that will handle the and
events of the
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the and events.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The row being created or data-bound.
Gets the row being created or data-bound.
Represents the method that handles the event of a control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the new page.
Gets or sets the index of the new page.
Represents the method that will handle the
event of the .
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the new row to select in the control.
Gets or sets the index of the new row to select in the control.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event of the control.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The sort expression used to sort the items in the control.
A that indicates the direction in which to sort the items in the control.
Gets or sets the direction in which to sort the control.
Gets or sets the expression used to sort the items in the control.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
The index of the row being updated.
Gets a dictionary of field name/value pairs that represent the primary key of the row to update.
Gets a dictionary containing the revised values of the non-key field name/value pairs in the row to update.
Gets a dictionary containing the original field name/value pairs in the row to update.
Gets the index of the row being updated.
Represents the method that will handle the event of the
control.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Provides data for the event.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Number of rows affected by the update operation.
The exception (if any) that was raised during the update operation.
Constructor. Initializes a new instance of the class.
Number of rows affected by the update operation.
The exception (if any) that was raised during the update operation.
A dictionary that contains the key field name/value pairs for the updated record.
A dictionary that contains the new field name/value pairs for the updated record.
A dictionary that contains the original field name/value pairs for the updated record.
Gets the number of rows affected by the update operation.
Gets the exception (if any) that was raised during the update operation.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether an exception that was raised during the update operation was
handled in the event handler.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the control should remain in edit mode after an update operation.
Gets a dictionary that contains the key field name/value pairs for the updated record.
Gets a dictionary that contains the new field name/value pairs for the updated record.
Gets a dictionary that contains the original field name/value pairs for the updated record.
Class used for setting filtering behavior in the control.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Owner.
Gets or sets the expand animation effect.
The default value is
Gets or sets the expand delay in milliseconds before drop-down operators list opens.
The default value is 100.
Gets or sets the animation duration in milliseconds.
The default value is 500.
Specifies the transition for the expand animation.
The default value is .
Gets or sets the collapse animation effect.
The default value is .
Gets or sets the collapse delay in milliseconds before the drop-down operators list starts hiding.
The default value is 100.
Gets or sets the collapse animation duration in milliseconds.
The default value is 500.
Specifies the transition for the collapse animation.
The default value is .
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the filtering will be performed immediately once a filter operator is selected.
The default value is true.
Determines whether or not the drop-down operators list's position will be adjusted to fit in window bounds.
The default value is false.
Provides data for the and
events of the control.
This is the text that will be displayed in the grouped Header or Footer.
This is the text that is being grouped.
Column that is being grouped.
Column initiated grouping.
Type of item that is being grouped, either or
.
First index in the Items collection for the data being grouped.
Last index in the Items collection for the data being grouped.
Represents the method that will handle the event
of the control..
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Represents the method that will handle the event.
The source of the event.
A object that contains the event data.
Occurs when the property has been set to .
This allows the customization of aggregate cell contents for text displayed in the group header or footer.
GroupInfo is used to customize the appearance and position of groups.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Returns a string that represents the current object.
A string that represents the current object.
Restores the previously saved view state of the object.
An object that represents the state to restore.
Saves the changes to the object since the time the page was posted back to the server.
The object that contains the changes to the view state of the .
Causes the object to track changes to its state so that it can be persisted across requests.
Determines whether the control should insert group header and/or group
footer rows for this column.
One of the values.
The default value is .
Set value to to disable grouping for
the column.
Set to ,
or
to create groups and define the position of the group rows.
To group by a column, remember to sort the data on the column. The grid inserts group header and
footer rows whenever the value being grouped on changes. If you don't sort the data, there will be
a lot of group header and footer rows.
Determines whether the user will be able to collapse and expand the groups by clicking on the group
headers, and also determines whether groups will be initially collapsed or expanded.
One of the values.
The default value is .
Determines the images used to show collapsed nodes on the grid.
By default, these properties are set to images that look like the '+' and '-' icons used in TreeView
controls. You can select your own images, and even use different images for different groups.
Determines the images used to show expanded nodes on the grid.
By default, these properties are set to images that look like the '+' and '-' icons used in TreeView
controls. You can select your own images, and even use different images for different groups.
Determines whether groupings containing a single row are grouped.
If False, groupings which contain a single row will not be grouped. The default value is True.
Determines the text that is displayed in the group header rows.
The text may include up to two placeholders:
"{0}" is replaced with the value being grouped on and
"{1}" is replaced with the group's column header
The text may also include HTML tags which you can use to add formatting commands.
The text may be set to "Custom". Doing so causes the event to be raised when
processing a grouped header.
This sample shows how to use HTML tags and placeholders.
col.GroupInfo.HeaderText = "Totals for {0}
col.GroupInfo.HeaderText = "Totals for {0};
Determines the text that is displayed in the group footer rows.
The text may include up to two placeholders:
"{0}" is replaced with the value being grouped on and
"{1}" is replaced with the group's column header
The text may also include HTML tags which you can use to add formatting commands.
The text may be set to "Custom". Doing so causes the event to be raised when
processing a grouped footer.
This sample shows how to use HTML tags and placeholders.
col.GroupInfo.FooterText = "Totals for {0}
col.GroupInfo.FooterText = "Totals for {0};
Determines the style used to render group header and footer rows.
This style is based on the grid's property.
If you are grouping on a single column, you probably won't have to change this style.
If you are creating several levels of grouping, however, you will usually set the BackColor
and ForeColor of each group header/footer to a different value to emphasize the structure of the data.
Determines the style used to render group header rows.
This style is based on the grid's property.
If you are grouping on a single column, you probably won't have to change this style.
If you are creating several levels of grouping, however, you will usually set the BackColor and
ForeColor of each group header/footer to a different value to emphasize the structure of the data.
Storage used for persisting elements of object state which can't be
serialized to JSON using .
GroupRows
helper class responsible for generating group headers, footers, and aggregates.
Summary description for Tally.
Class that handles merging of rows.
CellRange helper structure.
Class used for setting resizing behavior in the control.
Constructor. Creates a new instance of the class.
Owner.
Gets or sets the movement span of incremental resizing.
Web control specialized for editing the date and time.
C1DateInput control renders a date editor.
The main Web control used for entering and editing information
of any data type in a text form. Supports data formatting,
edit mask, data validation and other features.
Supports formatted and masked editing of all data types,
including additional functionality.
Apart from being the main data editor control,
C1MaskedInput also serves as the base class for specialized
controls such as C1DateInput and C1NumericInput.
Base abstract class for all C1WebInput controls.
Creates an instance of C1InputBase class.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
GetClientResourceFullName
Gets a resource URL that can be used by the browser.
Gets a URL that can be used by the browser.
Name of the server-side resource or URL.
String, Url for using in browser.
Gets a collection of ScriptReference objects that define script resources that the control requires.
A collection of ScriptReference objects.
Occurs when property begin changing.
Property changing can be aborted by returning false
if true changing of property will be aborted without any prompts
Occurs when the property has changed.
Enables a server control to process an event raised when a form is posted to the server.
Loads data from the client.
A hashtable that stores the data name and value.
Processes the postback data.
Signals the server control to notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Returns client script text for client Culture initialization.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Gets or sets the programmatic identifier assigned to the server control.
Server control identifier generated by ASP.NET.
Text displayed in the input box.
Note: For C1MaskedInput controls, this property returns
a text value without any prompts and literals.
Alignment of the text in the input box.
CultureInfo object that is currently used by the control.
CultureInfo object. Each culture has different conventions
for displaying dates, time, numbers, currency, and other
information. Neutral cultures are not supported.
Returning value can be null if Culture is not defined.
The CultureInfo class specifies a unique name for each culture,
based on the RFC 3066 standard for Windows Vista and later,
and the RFC 1766 standard for pre-Windows Vista operating systems.
The name is a combination of an ISO 639 two-letter lowercase
culture code associated with a language and an ISO 3166 two-letter
uppercase subculture code associated with a country or region.
Allows smart input behavior.
If True, then browser response is disabled when the ENTER key is pressed.
Visibility and display position of the custom button.
Visibility and display position of the Up/Down buttons.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the contents of the Input control can be changed.
Gets or sets the enabled property used by the control.
Fires when the control loses the input focus.
Fires when the control receives focus.
Fires when the control is initialized.
Fires when the user enters invalid input in the control.
Fires when the user changes text in the control.
Fires when the user presses a key.
Fires when the user presses an alphanumeric key.
Fires when the user releases a key.
Fires when the user clicks the control with either mouse button.
Fires when the user releases a mouse button while the mouse is over the control.
Fires when the user moves the mouse pointer into the control.
Fires when the user moves the mouse pointer outside the boundaries of the control.
Fires when the user clicks the custom button.
Fires when the text is changed.
Gets the control name.
Initializes a new instance of the C1MaskedInput class.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Gets the CSS class name for the control.
Notifies server controls that use composition-based implementation to create
any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
RenderContents override
HtmlTextWriter
Returns true if Css1Compat, otherwise BackCompat
Update Masked Text provider with current control's properties
Gets a collection of script descriptors that represent ECMAScript (JavaScript) client components.
An IEnumerable collection of ScriptDescriptor objects.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether PromptChar
can be entered as valid data by the user.
Even when AllowPromptAsInput is true, the prompt character
must be valid for the current location in the mask in order
to be accepted. For example, if PromptChar is "*", and the
current location in the mask demands the user enter a digit,
entering an asterisk (*) will fail.
Gets or sets the input mask to use at run time. Mask must be a
string composed of one or more of the masking elements,
enumeration parts, or numeric ranges.
For a list of masking elements,
see the Defining C1MaskedInput topic.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the prompt characters
in the input mask are hidden when the C1MaskedInput
loses focus.
Returns true if PromptChar is hidden when the C1MaskedInput
does not have focus; otherwise, false. The default is false.
Gets or sets the character to be substituted for the actual input characters.
Mask property must be non-empty for the PasswordChar property
to take effect. Another option is to set UseSystemPasswordChar,
which will show all displayable characters as password chars.
Indicates if the displayable text in the control should appear as the
default password character.
Gets or sets the character used to represent the absence of
user input in the control.
A prompt character is placed in editable positions that have not yet been assigned an input value. The default is an underscore (_).
Gets or sets a value that determines how an input character that matches the prompt character should be handled.
Returns true if the prompt character entered as input causes the current editable
position in the mask to be reset; otherwise, false to indicate that the prompt
character is to be processed as a normal input character. The default is
true.
Gets or sets a value that determines how a space input
character should be handled.
Returns true if the space input character causes the current editable position in
the mask to be reset; otherwise, false to indicate that it is to be processed
as a normal input character. The default is true.
ResetOnSpace is useful when assigning text that was saved
excluding the prompt, where the prompt is replaced with a space.
Before restoring such a string, setting ResetOnSpace to True will
reset the prompt characters at the positions occupied by spaces
in the input string.
Specifies whether to show a hint with a list of available enumeration values
for enumeration parts in the mask.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user is allowed to re-enter literal
values.
Returns true to allow literals to be reentered; otherwise,
false to prevent the user from overwriting literal characters.
The default is true.
Masks can contain literal and editable characters.
If an attempt is made to add an input character to the position
in a mask occupied by a literal, the value of the SkipLiterals
property determines the result.
Gets or sets the text as it is currently displayed to the user.
Returns text without any prompts and literals.
Gets the text input by the user as well as any instances of
the prompt character.
Gets the text input by the user as well as any literal
characters defined in the mask and any instances of the
prompt character.
Gets the text input by the user as well as any literal
characters defined in the mask.
Gets or sets the color used to identify invalid input.
Property omitted if Color is Empty.
Default value is Empty.
Initializes a new instance of the C1DateInput class.
Gets or sets the format pattern to display the date value.
The default value is d.
Gets the resulting format pattern used for Date values.
Gets or sets the DateTime value.
This is the value of the starting year to be used for the smart input year calculation.
If a single digit greater than '5' is entered, then the starting year is considered to be
the year of the previous century.
Suppose the SmartInputMode property is set to True,
and you set the StartYear property to '1900'.
If the user enters a '5' in the C1DateInput control at run time,
then the year will become '1/1/1951'. Suppose the StartYear is '2000' and a '5' is entered;
then the year will become '2051'. The range for the StartYear is 100 years,
so if the starting year is '1951', then the ending year will be '2050'.
So if a '5' is entered and followed by '1', then it refers to the previous century;
if it is followed by '0', then it refers to the current century.
Text that will be displayed for null date.
The default value is "Enter value here".
Shows Null Text if the Date value is empty and the control loses its focus.
Minimal date "01.01.0001 00:00:00" used as null date.
The default value is false.
Text representation of the date value.
Gets or sets the C1Calendar control to interact with.
Gets or sets popup position of the C1Calendar control.
Gets or sets the alignment of the Up/Down buttons.
Default alignment for date editors is Right.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Overridden. This property is hidden in date editors.
Fired when the Date is changed.
Fires when the Date value is changed.
Type of enum part
C1MaskedTextProvider. Custom wraper for MaskedTextProvider.
Constructor
Mask string.
Culture.
ApplyFormatToEnumValue
Get and returns formated default value for enumeration part
Preparse mask for enumeration parts:
Returns mask without custom parts(such as enumeration parts)
Web control specialized for editing currency values.
Using the numeric editor, you can specify input without
writing any custom validation logic in your application.
Web control specialized for editing numeric values.
Using the numeric editor, you can specify input without
writing any custom validation logic in your application.
Initializes a new instance of the C1NumericInput class.
Minimum value that can be entered.
Maximum value that can be entered.
Not used by numeric controls.
Gets or sets a numeric value.
Indicates the number of decimal places to display.
Indicates whether the thousands group separator will be
inserted between every three decimal digits
(number of digits in thousands group depends on the
selected Culture).
Text that will be displayed for null value(value that equals to MinValue).
Gets or sets how much to increase/decrease value with up/down buttons.
Show Null Text if Numeric value is empty(equals MinValue) and control looses its focus.
MinValue is used as null value.
Alignment of the text.
Alignment of the Up/Down buttons.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Not used by numeric controls.
Fires when the value is changed.
Fires immediately after the value typed in the input box is out of Min or Max bounds.
Initializes a new instance of the C1CurrencyInput class.
Format degits, add groups separators, decimal separator, decimals
-1 means autosize
Web control derived from C1NumericInput specialized for
editing percent values.
Using the numeric editor, you can specify input without
writing any custom validation logic in your application.
Initializes a new instance of the C1PercentInput class.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
Page
Gets or sets the direction that the progress bar will fill.
The setting for a progress bar that will fill from left to right (for a horizontal bar), or from top to bottom (for a vertical bar).
The setting for a progress bar that will fill from right to left (for a horizontal bar), or from bottom to top (for a vertical bar).
Positioning of the label within the progress bar.
No label is displayed.
Label is displayed on the left or top of the control.
Label is displayed on the control.
Label is displayed on the right or bottom of the control.
Label is displayed along the edge of the progress
Represents a ProgressBar in an ASP.NET Web page.
Rises RunTask event.
A C1ProgressBarTaskEventArgs object that contains the event data.
Creates a new instance of the C1ProgressBar class.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based
implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for
posting back or rendering.
Create Backcloth for C1ProgressBar.
Return a control.
Create BacklabelArea for C1ProgressBar.
Return a control.
Create FrontlabelArea for C1ProgressBar.
Return a control.
Create progress for C1ProgressBar.
Return a control.
Gets the class name of visual style.
Determine compound css class.
Notify to create child controls.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.Init event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Get total value of the C1ProgressBar.
Return a int value.
Get the current value of the C1ProgressBar.
Return a int value.
Get the value according to one pixel.
Return a double value.
Get the pixel according to current value.
Return a double value.
Get the progress scrollable length.
Return a int value.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
Notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
Fires when a server side task is running.
Gets or Sets ID of the Button which starts a server side task.
Gets or Sets ID of the Button which stops a server side task.
Gets or sets the height of the slider.
Gets or sets the width of the slider.
The tooltip displayed when the mouse is over the control.
Gets or sets the URL of the image for the progress indicator.
Gets or sets the minimum incrementing width (in pixel) of the indicator image when the indicator is advancing to a new position.
String that will be used as a format for the progress bar labels.
Positioning of the label within the progress bar.
Gets or sets the direction that the progress bar will fill.
The direction in which control is laid out.
Gets or sets the maximum value of C1ProgressBar.
Gets or sets the minimum value of C1ProgressBar.
Gets or sets the value of C1ProgressBar.
Delay in milliseconds before the value of the progress bar is changing.
Define how long (in milliseconds) the animation of the progress will run.
The easing that is applied to the animation.
Path to visual styles.
VisualStyle name.
If true then control will use VisualStyle embedded into control's assembly.
otherwise control will load VisualStyle from disk.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Changed the type of control's tag.
Gets or sets if C1ProgressBar is Enabled.
Fires on client side before the value of the progress bar is changing.
Fires on client side when the value is changing.
Fires on client side when the value has been changed.
Fires on client side when the progress bar is clicked.
Fires on client side when the mouse is down on the progress bar.
Fires on client side when the user moves the mouse pointer outside the progress bar.
Fires on client side when the mouse is over the progress bar.
Fires on client side when the mouse is released from the progress bar.
Delegate type for handling events that are related to the ValueChanged event.
C1ProgressBarTaskEventArgs
constructor
The specified HttpResponse object.
Update Progress for C1ProgressBar
The new value.
Update Progress for C1ProgressBar
The new value.
The extra data.
ExtraData
Value
Serializes C1ProgressBar Control.
Constructor
ThumbsInteractionMode
Thumbs are free to slide past each other.
Thumbs cannot slide past or push each other.
Thumbs will push each other when they slide next to one another.
TrackFillMode
Show extra styles in track bar for both Value and SecondaryValue.
Values on track bar are not displayed.
Show extra style with ValueFill in track bar for area between edge and main Value only.
Show extra style with ValueFill in track bar for area between Value and SecondaryValue.
C1SpellChecker
C1SpellChecker
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based
implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Raises the Init event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
Get result through Callback.
Return a string.
Raise Callback event
The specified event argument.
Gets or sets the width of the Web server control.
Gets or sets the height of the Web server control.
SpellChecker dictionary path.
Example of the relative path: "~/Dictionaries/C1Spell_de-DE.dct"
Id of the Text control for spell check.
C1WebSpellChecker Theme.
VisualStyle name.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Changed the type of control's tag.
Returns javascript string with reference to javascript object
Represents style of the mouse pointer.
Not set.
Default.
crosshair.
Help.
Move.
Pointer.
Progress.
Text.
Wait.
North resize.
North-East resize.
East resize.
South-East resize.
South resize.
South-West resize.
West resize.
North-West resize.
C1WebSpellChecker Theme.
Duplicates the style properties of the specified Style into the instance of the Style class that this method is called from.
Combines the style properties of the specified Style with the instance of the Style class that this method is called from.
Removes any defined style elements from the state bag.
Loads the server control's previously saved
view state to the control.
This member overrides Control.SaveViewState.
This member overrides Control.TrackViewState.
Reset
Copy from a StyleTheme.
The specified object.
Merge With.
The specified object.
TextElements Style.
TextInputElements Style.
TextInputElementsDisabled Style.
Gets or sets the Style for buttons.
Gets or sets the HotStyle for buttons.
Gets or sets the PressedStyle for buttons.
Gets or sets the DisabledStyle for buttons.
ViewState
Extended Style.
Constructor
UrlResolver
Adds information about all not empty style properties
to the list of attributes to render.
Fill style with attributes.
The specified CssStyleCollection object.
The specified IUrlResolutionService object.
Duplicates the non-empty style properties of the specified Style
into the instance of the Style class that
this method is called from.
Combines the style properties of the specified Style
into the instance of the Style class that
this method is called from.
Removes any defined style elements from the style.
Returns a string representation of the C1TableItemStyle object.
This property is hidden.
This property is hidden.
Gets or sets the foreground color.
Gets or sets the background color.
Gets or sets the border color.
Gets or sets the border style.
Gets or sets the border width.
Gets or sets the cascading style sheet (CSS) class rendered on the client.
Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of the contents in a cell.
Gets or sets the vertical alignment of the contents in a cell.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the contents of a cell wrap in the cell.
Transparent value. Accepts value in range 0 - 100.
Cursor style.
URL to background image.
Style for each border side.
Represent resulting string that will apply to style HTML attribute.
Gets a value indicating whether any style elements have been defined in the state bag
Style for each border side.
Constructor.
Represent resulting string what will apply to style html attribute.
Adds information about all not empty style properties to the list of attributes to render.
HtmlTextWriter object.
Owner WebControl.
Conditional parameters.
Adds information about all not empty style properties to the list of attributes to render.
Duplicates the non-empty style properties of the specified Style
into the instance of the Style class that
this method is called from.
Combines the style properties of the specified Style
into the instance of the Style class that
this method is called from.
Removes any defined style elements from the style.
Returns a string representation of the BorderDetailedStyle object.
Loads the previously saved view state of the BorderDetailedStyle object.
Saves the current view state of the BorderDetailedStyle object.
Marks the starting point to begin tracking and saving view-state changes to the BorderDetailedStyle object.
Left border color.
Right border color.
Top border color.
Bottom border color.
Left border style.
Right border style.
Top border style.
Bottom border style.
Left border width.
Right border width.
Top border width.
Bottom border width.
Represent resulting string that will apply to style HTML attribute.
Gets a value that indicates whether the BorderDetailedStyle object is saving changes to its view state.
Converts a predefined color name or an RGB color value to and
from a System.Drawing.Color object.
Constructor.
ConvertFrom override.
ConvertTo override
Converts Color type to string representation.
Color to convert.
Interface that must be implemented by custom spell-check parsers.
Method that retrieves the next word to spell-check in a string.
String that contains the text being spell-checked.
Position being checked within the string.
that specifies types of words that should be ignored.
Last word retrieved by the parser (used to detect duplicates).
A object that represents the next word to be spell-checked, or
null if all the text has been spell-checked.
Method that filters any unwanted characters out of a string to be checked.
Raw text to be checked.
A modified word to be checked, null to skip checking this string,
or the same word if no filtering is required.
This method is useful in custom parsers that should ignore specific characters
or words.
For example, a parser that parses strings with accelerator characters should
filter out the ampersands before the word is checked.
Class that represents a character range within a string.
This is used by the control to represent the
spelling mistakes found in text.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Text contained in the range.
Starting index of the range within the text.
Whether the range is misspelled or just a duplicate.
Determines whether this is equal to another.
to compare to this one.
True if both objects contain the same word at the same position.
Serves as a hash function for the type.
A hash code for this .
Extends a over whitespace.
String that contains the .
that will be expanded.
Expanded .
The method returns a new object that includes the original
plus any whitespace that immediately follows it. If there is no whitespace after the original ,
then the returned value is extended to include any whitespace that precedes the original .
This method is used to extend editor selections before deleting duplicate words.
Determines whether a character is spell-checkable.
Character to test.
True if the character is spell-checkable, false otherwise.
This method returns true for all letter and digit characters, underscores, and single quotes.
Gets the next word in a string, starting from a given position.
String that contains the text.
Starting position where to look for a word.
that determines words to ignore.
Previous word (used to detect duplicates).
A object that contains the next word in the string,
or null if there are no more words in the string.
Gets the word at a given position in the string.
String that contains the text.
Position where to look for a word.
that determines words to ignore.
A object that contains the word at the specified
position in the string, or null if there are no more words at the specified position.
Gets the string represented by this .
Gets the starting index of the string represented by this within the text.
Gets the length of the string represented by this .
Gets the end index of the string represented by this .
Gets whether this contains the same string as the previous one.
List of objects.
Adds a new to the list.
Word to add to the list.
Starting index of the character range within the text.
Whether the range is a duplicate of the previous range in the text.
Gets the that contains a specified position within the text.
Position within the text.
A that contains the specified position,
or null if there is no error at the specified position.
Gets the index of the that contains the specified position within the text.
Position within the text.
Index of the in the list that contains the specified position,
or -1 if there is no error at the specified position.
Determines whether the given is equal to this one.
to compare to this one.
True if both objects contain the same members.
Serves as a hash function for the type.
A hash code for this .
Represents the method that sell me will handle the C1SpellChecker.BadWordFound event.
C1SpellChecker that fired the event.
BadWordEventArgs that contains the event data.
Provides data for the C1SpellChecker.BadWordFound event.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Dialog that raised the event, or null if the event was not raised by a dialog.
being spell-checked.
that contains the bad word and its position within the text.
that contains all the bad words found in the text.
Gets a reference to the ISpellDialog that is being used to spell-check a control.
If this parameter is null, then no spell dialog is active and the bad word was found in
as-you-type mode.
Gets a reference to the control that is being spell-checked.
Gets a object that contains the bad word and its location within
the text being spell-checked.
Gets a that contains all errors detected in the text.
The property contains the specific error being handled. You can
use the collection to determine the total number of errors and the index of this error
within the collection.
Gets or sets whether this bad word should be ignored by the .
If the property is not null, then the error is about to be displayed
in a spell dialog. Setting the Cancel parameter to true in this case causes the dialog
to skip to the next error.
If the property is null, then the error was detected in as-you-type
mode and the word is about to be underlined. Setting the Cancel parameter to true in
this case prevents the word from being underlined.
Represents the method that will handle the C1SpellChecker.AutoReplace event.
C1SpellChecker that fired the event.
AutoReplaceEventArgs that contains the event data.
Provides data for the C1SpellChecker.AutoReplace event.
Initializes a new instance of an .
where the text is being replaced.
String that contains the text about to be replaced.
String that contains the replacement text.
Position of the string in the control's text.
Gets a reference to the control where the replacement will take place.
Gets the string that is about to be replaced.
Gets or sets the string that contains the replacement text.
Gets or sets whether to skip this replacement.
Looks up a localized string similar to abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Looks up a localized string similar to 'åàáâäçèéêëíîïñóôöõùúûüœæлидерыкпфгаютвянйзоьсмбучхцжшщёэ.
Component that provides spell-checking services to controls and applications.
The C1SpelChecker component supports three spell-checking modes:
Batch mode
Use the CheckText(string), CheckWord, and GetSuggestions(string, int)
methods to check strings and get lists of errors and spelling suggestions.
Dialog mode
Use the CheckControl(ISpellCheckableEditor method to check the content of any
TextBoxBase-derived controls using a modal dialog. The C1SpellChecker will
check the text and display a dialog where the user can choose to correct or ignore each error.
You can also check editors that do not derive from TextBoxBase. To do that, you
have to create a wrapper class that implements the ISpellCheckableEditor interface.
As-you-type mode
Set the extender property SpellCheck on any TextBoxBase-derived control to true,
and the C1SpellChecker will monitor changes to the control. Any spelling mistakes will be indicated
on the control by a red, wavy underline; right-clicking the errors will show a context menu with spelling
suggestions.
You can also provide as-you-type spelling support for editors that do not derive from TextBoxBase.
To do that, you have to create a wrapper class that implements the ISpellCheckableRichEditor
interface.
Dictionary Deployment
The C1SpellChecker component uses spelling dictionaries stored in files with a 'dct' extension.
To select which dictionary to use, use the MainDictionary property and set
SpellDictionaryBase.FileName to the name of the file you want to use.
The easiest way to ensure the dictionary is deployed correctly is to add to your projects a reference
to the dictionary file(s) you want to use, then set the Build Action property to None and
the Copy to Output Directory property to Copy if newer. This way, the dictionaries will
be copied to the output directory along with the application executable and the C1SpellChecker
assembly.
When using this deployment method, make sure the main dictionary's SpellDictionaryBase.FileName
value specifies a file name without a path. This way, the component will search for the dictionary in the
directory where the C1SpellChecker assembly is located.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Checks a string containing text and returns a list of spelling errors.
Text to be spell-checked.
Index of the character where to start checking.
Length of the string to check.
List of objects that describe the spelling mistakes.
Checks a string containing text and returns a list of spelling errors.
Text to be spell-checked.
Index of the character where to start checking.
List of objects that describe the spelling mistakes.
Checks a string containing text and returns a list of spelling errors.
Text to be spell-checked.
List of objects that describe the spelling mistakes.
Checks a word to see if it's spelled correctly.
Word to check.
True if the word is in the dictionary, false otherwise.
Gets an array containing suggestions for a misspelled word.
Word to suggest alternatives for.
Maximum number of suggestions to provide.
An array containing suggestions for the parameter.
Gets an array containing suggestions for a misspelled word.
Word to suggest alternatives for.
An array containing suggestions for the parameter.
Raises the event.
that contains the event data.
Raises the event.
that contains the event data.
Gets a value that indicates whether the main spelling dictionary has been loaded.
If cannot find the spelling dictionary, it will not throw
any exceptions. The Enabled property will be set to false and the component will not
be able to spell-check any text.
You can check the state of the and the
by inspecting their property.
Gets a object that specifies spell-checking options.
Options available include types of words to ignore, whether to display suggestions in a context menu,
the number of suggestions to display, and so on.
Gets the main dictionary used for spell-checking.
This is the main dictionary. It is stored in a compressed format, and is read-only.
You can edit the spell dictionaries or create your own using the
C1DictionaryEditor utility that ships with .
This option can be useful for domain-specific applications that require the
use of technical jargon (for example, medical, legal, and so on).
Users cannot add words to this dictionary, only to the .
Gets the user dictionary used for spell-checking.
This is the user dictionary. The user may add words to this dictionary using the
spell-checking dialog, and it is automatically persisted to the specified file.
Gets or sets a custom spell-checking dictionary.
This property allows you to specify additional custom dictionaries to be used
in addition to the standard and
dictionaries.
Gets or sets a custom spell-checking parser.
This property allows you to specify a custom parser for breaking up text into words
to be spell-checked.
For example, you may want to use a custom parser when checking source code files.
This way you can spell-check the comments in the code and skip the actual code.
Gets the list of words to ignore during spell-checking.
The list is used by the built-in spell dialog and by the as-you-type mechanism.
The user may add words to this list using the "Ignore All" button in the spell dialog
or the "Ignore All" option in the as-you-type context menu.
Strings in the list are case-sensitive.
Gets a list of words and replacements to use while spell-checking.
This list is used by the built-in spell dialog and by the as-you-type mechanism.
The built-in spell dialog checks the list when it finds a misspelled word. If a match
is found, the misspelled word is replaced with the corresponding list entry.
The as-you-type mechanism looks for matches whenever the user types a character that
is not a letter or a digit. If a match is found, the text is replaced with the corresponding
list entry.
Note the difference in operation between the two modes. In as-you-type spell-checking,
any matches will be replaced, whether the key is spelled correctly or not. In dialog mode,
keys that are spelled correctly will not be flagged as errors and therefore will not be
replaced. For example, if the AutoReplaceList contains an entry with the strings
("attn.", "attention of"), then typing "attn. " into the editor will trigger a replacement
and the editor will contain "attention of ". However, because "attn." is not a spelling
error, the spell dialog will not replace instances of the string "attn." with "attention of".
The fires the event before
making each automatic replacement. The event handler may cancel the replacement.
Strings in the list are case-sensitive.
The example below causes the to monitor spelling on a
control. If the user types the string "teh", it is automatically
replaced with "the". If the user types "cant", it is automatically replaced with "can't".
// build AutoReplace list
c1SpellChecker1.AutoReplaceList.Clear();
c1SpellChecker1.AutoReplaceList.Add("teh", "the");
c1SpellChecker1.AutoReplaceList.Add("cant", "can't");
// activate as-you-type spell-checking on textBox1
c1SpellChecker1.SetSpellChecking(textBox1, true);
Event that fires when a spelling error is found by the C1SpellChecker.
This event fires when the component detects a spelling error in a control.
This happens while a spell dialog is displayed (see the CheckControl(ISpellCheckableEditor
method) or while the component is painting the red wavy underlines that mark misspelled words
in dynamic mode (see the SetSpellChecking method).
The event parameters have a Dialog property that allow the handler to determine
whether a spell dialog is being displayed or not.
The event parameters also have a Cancel property that can be used to ignore
the error.
Event that fires before the makes an automatic replacement
in the control's text.
automatically replaces text as the user types based on the
list of words specified by the property.
Class that contains a list of words and methods looking them up and loading them from a compressed file.
Base class for built-in and user dictionaries (see ( and
).
Interface implemented by all spell dictionaries.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Name of the file where the word list was loaded from.
Gets or sets a value that indicates whether
the dictionary has been loaded or why it hasn't.
Gets or sets whether the dictionary is enabled.
that owns the dictionary.
Ensures the dictionary is loaded, reading words from the file if necessary.
True if the dictionary is enabled and has been loaded successfully.
Gets a string that represents this object.
A string that represents this object.
Gets the fully qualified name of the file that contains the dictionary.
Whether to return a filename even if the file doesn't exist.
A complete file name which is guaranteed to exist, or an empty
string if the file name was not specified or could not be found.
If the path is not specified, the component looks for it in the
application folder, in the folder where the
assembly is installed, and in the system folder.
Loads the dictionary from the file specified by the property.
True if the dictionary was loaded successfully, false otherwise.
If the dictionary fails to load, this method returns false. In this case,
you can check the value of the dictionary's property to determine
why the file failed to load.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Gets or sets the name of the file that contains the dictionary.
Gets or sets whether the dictionary is enabled.
Gets a value that indicates whether the dictionary was loaded
successfully.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Loads the dictionary from the file specified by the property.
True if the dictionary was loaded successfully, false otherwise.
If the dictionary fails to load, this method returns false. In this case,
you can check the value of the dictionary's property to determine
why the file failed to load.
Gets or sets the name of the file that contains the dictionary.
Sets the password needed to load password-protected dictionaries.
If the dictionary file in use is password-protected, you must provide a
valid password in order to use it.
The dictionary files that ship with are not
password-protected. You can create password-protected dictionaries using the
dictionary utility shipped with .
Gets the number of words loaded in the dictionary.
DictionaryEntries is a dictionary that associates:
key: hash codes for the lower-case version of the strings
value: bytes (0 for lower-case strings, 1 for upper-case strings)
Initializes a new instance of a .
Initial capacity of the list.
Adds a word to the list.
Word to add to the list.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Loads the word list from a file.
that owns the word list.
Fully qualified name of the file that contains the word list.
Password used to load the entries if the file is protected.
Describes the current state of a .
The dictionary has not been loaded yet.
The dictionary has been successfully loaded.
The dictionary has not been loaded because the specified file could not be found.
The dictionary has not been loaded because the specified file has invalid format.
The dictionary is protected and the password used to load it was missing or incorrect.
Specifies flags that determine whether words should be ignored during spell-checking.
Do not ignore any words.
Ignore words that contain numbers (digits).
Ignore words that are all uppercase.
Ignore words that contain a mix of uppercase and lowercase characters, except
when there is a single uppercase at the start (for example, "Lowercase" would
not be ignored, but "LowerCase" and "lowerCase" would).
Ignore words that look like URLs or file names.
Ignore text in HTML/XML tags.
Default setting: ignores numbers, mixed case, URLs, and HTML tags.
Ignores numbers, mixed case, URLs, HTML tags, and uppercase.
Specifies the language to be used when displaying the built-in spell dialog
Choose dialog language according to the current application culture.
Show Dutch dialog.
Show English dialog.
Show French dialog.
Show German dialog.
Show Italian dialog.
Show Portuguese dialog.
Show Spanish dialog.
Class that contains spelling options including words to ignore, whether to show suggestions in
a spell context menu, etc.
Creates a new instance of the C1Editor class.
The specified C1SpellCheckerComponent object.
Gets a string representation of this object.
A string representation of this object.
Gets or sets types of words to ignore during the spell-check.
Gets or sets the DialogLanguage used when displaying the built-in spell dialog.
The dialog language does not affect spelling. To change the language used for spelling, use
theC1SpellChecker.MainDictionary property to select a different spelling dictionary.
By default, the built-in spell dialog C1SpellDialog is displayed in the
language specified by the current culture. If the current culture specifies a language that is not
available, then the dialog will be displayed in English.
See the DialogLanguage enumeration for a list of supported dialog languages.
that can be used to edit enumerations with a Flags attribute.
Shows a checked list box with one entry per flag, users can check any combination.
Special chars:
en: ? èé? ïñ?? ?
es: ? ? ? ñó ??
fr: àáâäçèéêëíîï óô??ûü
de: ??âä éê ? ? ?
pt : àá?çèéê ? óô ???
ALL: åàáâäçèéêëíîïñóôöõùúûü
Start with alpha + '
if not enough, try ALL
Class that contains a list of additional words and methods for managing the list.
This class is used to store user dictionaries. It provides methods for adding and
removing words, as well as saving the dictionary.
Adds a word to the dictionary.
Word to add to the dictionary.
True if the word was added to the dictionary, false if it was already present.
Removes a word from the dictionary.
Word to remove from the dictionary.
True if the word was removed from the dictionary, false if it was not found.
Clears the dictionary removing all words in it.
Saves the dictionary back to a file.
True in case of success, false otherwise.
If the dictionary cannot be saved, the reason is stored in the property.
Loads the dictionary from a file.
True if the dictionary was loaded successfully, false otherwise.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Gets or sets the name of the file that contains the dictionary.
DictionaryEntries is a dictionary that associates:
key: hash codes for lower case strings
value: bytes (0 for lower-case entry, 1 for upper-case)
Adds a word to the list.
Word to add to the list.
Checks whether the dictionary contains a given word.
Word to lookup.
True if the dictionary contains the word, false otherwise.
Loads the word list from a UTF-8 encoded text file.
that owns the word list.
Fully qualified name of the UTF-8 file that contains the word list.
Not used.
Saves the word list to an UTF-8 encoded file.
Fully qualified name of the file to save
Keyed list of words to ignore while spell-checking.
Removes all elements from the list.
Inserts a word into the list at the specified index.
The zero-based at which the new item should be inserted.
The item to insert into the list.
Duplicate items are automatically discarded; the list will contain at most one copy of any given string.
Removes the word at the specified index from the collection.
The zero-based at which the new item should be removed.
Not supported.
Index of the element to replace.
Element to replace.
Obtains a key for the given element.
The element from which to obtain the key.
The key for the specified element.
Dictionary of words and their replacements.
C1CryptStream
reads and decrypts data from an encrypted zip base stream, or
encrypts and writes data to an encrypted zip base stream
Calculates a checksum value for the entry and compares it to the checksum that
was stored when the entry was created.
True if the checksum values match, false otherwise.
This method is used to check the integrity of the entries in the zip file. If the
calculated checksum does not match the stored checksum, then either the zip file is
corrupted or the program used to create the zip file is incompatible with
C1Zip.
Checks whether this can be read with the currently set password.
True if the entry can be read with the current password, or if the entry is not
encrypted.
This method is more efficient than using a try/catch block and trying to open the entry
to determine whether the current password is valid for the entry.
Returns a that can be used to read the content of the entry without
extracting it to a disk file.
A that can be used to read the data in the entry.
The returned is a , which
decompresses the data as it is read from the entry.
Gets the entry name. This is usually a file name, optionally including a path.
Gets the original (uncompressed) size of the entry, in bytes.
Gets the compressed size of the entry, in bytes.
Gets the checksum calculated when the entry was compressed.
This value can be used to check the integrity of the entry when it is decompressed.
Gets the date and time when the file used to create the entry was last modified.
This value can be used to check whether an entry needs to be updated because the
source file was modified since it was last compressed.
Gets or sets a comment associated with the entry.
Gets the file attributes associated with the entry.
Gets a value that determines whether the entry is encrypted.
Encrypted entries can only be extracted if the property
on the containing object is set to the password that was used
when the file was added to the zip file.
Copies the elements of the ICollection to an Array, starting at a
particular Array index.
The one-dimensional Array that is the destination of the elements copied from ICollection. The Array must have zero-based indexing.
The zero-based index in at which copying begins.
Determines whether the collection contains an entry with a given name.
Name of the entry to look for.
True if the collection contains an entry with the given name, false otherwise.
Gets the index of the entry with the specified name.
Name of the entry to look for.
The index of the entry in the collection, or -1 if the entry was not found.
Adds an entry to the current zip file.
Name of the file to add to the zip file.
By default, the directory name is not stored in the zip file. To store a specific
part of the directory name in the zip file, use the overloaded version of the
Add method with a pathLevels parameter.
Adds a list of entries to the current zip file.
Array containing the file names of the entries to be added to the zip file.
Adds an entry to the current zip file.
Name of the file to add to the zip file.
The number of path levels to be stored as the entry name.
By default, path names are not stored in the zip file. For example, adding
the file "c:\temp\samples\readme.txt" to the zip file will create an entry called
"readme.txt".
The parameter allows you to store one or more levels of the path in the entry name.
For example, adding the file "c:\temp\samples\readme.txt" to the zip file with =1
will create an entry called "samples\readme.txt".
Adds an entry to the current zip file.
Name of the file to add to the zip file.
Name of the new entry as stored in the zip file.
By default, entries in the zip file have the same name as the original (uncompressed)
file. This method allows you to specify a different name, including a path for example.
Adds a stream to the current zip file.
Stream that contains data for the new entry.
Name to be used for the new entry.
Adds the content of a folder to the current zip file.
The full path of the folder to be added to the zip file.
This method adds all files and sub folders to the zip file.
Adds the content of a folder to the current zip file.
The full path of the folder to be added to the zip file.
A mask that specifies which files to add.
If the folder contains sub folders, those are also added to the zip file.
Adds the content of a folder to the current zip file.
The full path of the folder to be added to the zip file.
A mask that specifies which files to add.
True to include sub folders, false to include only files at the root level.
Extracts the contents of the zip file into a specified path.
Destination path for the unzipped files.
If the zip file contains compressed folders, new folders will be created
under the destination path to preserve the hierarchical structure of the
archive.
Removes an entry from the current zip file.
Index of the entry to remove.
Removes an entry from the current zip file.
Name of the entry to remove (case-insensitive).
Removes several entries from the current zip file.
Array containing the indices of the entries to remove.
Removes several entries from the current zip file.
Array containing the names of the entries to remove.
Extracts a file from the current zip file.
Index of the entry to extract.
Name and location of the extracted file.
Extracts a file from the current zip file.
Name of the entry to extract.
Name and location of the extracted file.
Extracts a file from the current zip file.
Index of the entry to extract.
The entry is extracted to a file in the same folder as the current zip
file, with the same name as the entry.
Extracts a file from the current zip file.
Name of the entry to extract.
The entry is extracted to a file in the same folder as the current zip
file, with the same name as the entry.
Opens a stream for writing an entry into the zip file.
The name of the new entry.
Whether to use a memory stream or temporary file.
A stream that can be used to write data into the zip file. The entry
is not added until the stream is closed.
Gets a value that indicates whether access to the ICollection is synchronized (thread-safe).
Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the ICollection.
Gets the number of entries in the current zip file.
Gets the at the specified index.
Gets the with the given name (returns null if the entry cannot be found).
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Initializes a new instance of the class and creates or opens
a zip file associated with this new instance.
The name of the zip file to open or create.
True to create a new zip file, false to open an existing file.
If is true and the zip file already exists, it is overwritten
with a new empty file.
If is false and the zip file already exists, the existing file
is opened.
Initializes a new instance of the class and opens a zip file associated
with this new instance.
The name of the zip file to open.
If the file does not exist, a new empty file is created.
Initializes a new instance of the class and opens a zip stream associated
with this new instance.
that contains the zip data.
Whether to initialize the stream with an empty zip header or open an existing
zip file in the stream.
Initializes a new instance of the class and opens a zip stream associated
with this new instance.
that contains the zip data.
Opens an existing zip file.
The name of an existing zip file, including the path.
This method checks that the zip file exists and is a valid zip file, then
reads the zip file directory into the collection.
The zip file is then closed, and can be used by other applications. There is no
need to close the zip file explicitly.
Creates an empty zip file on disk.
The name of the zip file to create, including the path.
If a file by the same name already exists, it is deleted before the new one
is created.
Opens an existing zip file stored in a stream.
that contains a zip file.
This method allows you to open and work with a zip file stored in a stream
instead of in an actual file.
Typical usage scenarios for this are zip files stored as application resources
or in binary database fields.
The example below loads information from a zip file stored in an embedded resource.
To embed a zip file in an application, follow these steps:
1) Right-click the project node in Visual Studio, select the Add | Add Existing Item... menu option.
2) Select a zip file to add to the project as an embedded resource.
3) Select the newly added file and make sure the Build Action property is set to "Embedded Resource".
// get Stream from application resources
System.Reflection.Assembly a = this.GetType().Assembly;
using (Stream stream = a.GetManifestResourceStream("MyApp.test.zip"))
{
// open C1ZipFile on the stream
zip.Open(stream);
// enumerate the entries in the zip file,
foreach (C1ZipEntry ze in zip.Entries)
{
// show entries that have a 'txt' extension.
if (ze.FileName.ToLower().EndsWith(".txt"))
{
using (StreamReader sr = new StreamReader(ze.OpenReader()))
{
MessageBox.Show(sr.ReadToEnd(), ze.FileName);
}
}
}
}
Creates a new zip file in a stream.
that will contain the new zip file.
The code below creates a new on a memory stream, then adds
several files to it. Finally, the code gets the zipped data out as an array of bytes,
which could be stored in a database for example.
// create zip on a stream
MemoryStream msZip = new MemoryStream();
C1ZipFile zip = new C1ZipFile(msZip, true);
// add some entries to it
foreach (string f in Directory.GetFiles(@"c:\WINDOWS\Web\Wallpaper"))
{
zip.Entries.Add(f);
}
// get zipped data out as a byte array
byte[] zipData = msZip.ToArray();
Resets all data members of the object.
Disk files are automatically closed by C1Zip. You only need to use this
method if you want to break the connection between a class
and a physical zip file.
Refreshes all data members by re-opening the current zip file.
This method is useful in instances where other applications may have changed
the zip file and you want to make sure the information in the
collection is up to date.
Tests whether a file is a valid zip file.
Name of the file to test.
True if the file exists and is a valid zip file, false otherwise.
Tests whether a stream contains a valid zip file.
to test.
True if contains a valid zip file, false otherwise.
Opens the zip file for multiple operations.
By default, opens and closes the zip file
automatically whenever entries are added or removed.
This can cause delays in systems that have certain types of anti-virus
software installed, or in situations where you want to add a large number of
relatively small entries. In these cases, use the and
methods to keep the zip file open until the entire
operation is concluded.
Use a finally clause to ensure that the
method is called even if an exception occurs.
The code below opens a zip file, adds several entries to it, then closes
the file:
C1ZipFile zip = new C1ZipFile();
zip.Open(myzipfile);
try
{
zip.OpenBatch();
foreach (string fileName in Directory.GetFiles(path, "*.*"))
zip.Entries.Add(fileName);
}
finally
{
zip.CloseBatch();
}
Closes a zip file after it was opened with a call to the
method.
See the method for a complete description
and a sample.
Gets the name of the current zip file.
Gets or sets the password to use when adding or retrieving entries from the
zip file.
If the property is set to a non-empty string, any entries
added to the zip file will be encrypted and protected by the password. To extract these
entries later, the same password must be used.
The password applies to all entries from the moment it is set. If you set the
password to a non-empty string and then add several entries to the zip file, all
entries will use the same password.
Although C1Zip supports Unicode characters in passwords, several popular zip
utilities do not. To ensure your encrypted zip files can be opened with third-party
utilities, use passwords that consist of ASCII characters only.
Gets or sets a comment associated with the current zip file.
Gets or sets the compression level to use when adding entries to the zip file.
Higher compression settings create smaller files, but take longer to process. The
default setting () provides
a good trade-off between compression and speed.
Gets a that contains the entries in the zip file.
The collection is used to enumerate the entries in the zip file,
and also to add, remove, and expand entries.
Determines whether the component should overwrite read-only files when extracting
entries from the zip file.
Determines whether the component should overwrite hidden files when extracting
entries from the zip file.
Determines whether the component should overwrite system files when extracting
entries from the zip file.
Gets or sets the size of the largest stream to be compressed in memory.
compresses entries into temporary streams before
adding them to the zip file.
Entries with fewer than bytes are compressed
using a temporary memory stream.
Entries with more than bytes are compressed
using a temporary file. You can control the location of the temporary file using
the property.
Gets or sets the name of the temporary file to use when adding entries to the zip file.
creates temporary streams while adding entries to a zip file.
These temporary streams can be memory-based or disk-based, depending on the size of the
entry and on the setting of the property.
If a temporary file is used, you can control its location by
setting the property. If you don't select a path for the
temporary file, will create one automatically using the
method.
Encoding used for entry names and comments
NOTE: this is culture-dependent, which is a really bad idea, but most zip packers
use the default OEM code page to encode file names, so we have to go along with it...
Note that Encoding.Default seems like a logical choice but doesn't really work for
international locales. Instead, we need to create an encoding using the current
OEMCodePage. That allows accents and international characters to be used in file
names (like the zip built into Windows, allows names such as "Åland.txt", "Äiti.txt",
"Würth.txt", etc.).
This has nothing to do with compression, it's just used to encode and decode entry
names and comments.
Exception thrown when trying to open an invalid Zip file.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Message that describes the exception.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Message that describes the exception.
Name of the file that caused the exception.
Initializes a new instance of a .
Message that describes the exception.
Name of the file that caused the exception.
Inner exception.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Input stream that contains the compressed data.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Input stream that contains the compressed data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream was created in zip format.
Specifies the number of compressed bytes to read from the stream.
The parameter is needed only when a single stream contains
several compressed streams (in zip files for example). If this parameter is not
specified, it is assumed that the stream contains a single stream of compressed data.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Input stream that contains the compressed data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream was created in zip format.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Input stream that contains the compressed data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream contains header information (should be False for streams in zip files).
Specifies whether the compressed stream contains a CRC32 checksum (should be True for streams in zip files).
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Input stream that contains the compressed data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream was created in zip format.
Specifies the number of compressed bytes to read from the stream.
Specifies the method that was used to compress the stream.
Not supported.
Sets the number of compressed bytes to read from the underlying stream.
Reads a sequence of bytes from the underlying compressed stream, decompressing them into
a buffer, then advances the position within the stream by the number of bytes read.
An array of bytes. When this method returns, contains the specified byte array with the values between and ( + ) replaced by the uncompressed data read from the stream.
The zero-based byte offset in at which to begin storing the data read from the current stream.
The maximum number of (decompressed) bytes to be read from the current stream.
The total number of bytes read into the buffer. This may be less than the number of bytes
requested if that many bytes are not currently available, or zero (0) if the end of the stream has been reached.
This method is overridden and is not supported by the class.
Clears all buffers for this stream and causes any buffered data to be written to the underlying
stream.
Closes the current stream compressor and flushed any pending data into the base stream.
If the property is set to True (the default value),
then this method also closes the base stream and releases any resources (such as sockets
and file handles) associated with it.
Reads a byte from the stream and advances the position within the stream
by one byte, or returns -1 if at the end of the stream.
The unsigned byte cast to an , or -1 if at
the end of the stream.
Gets the underlying stream that contains the compressed data.
Gets or sets whether calling the method will also
close the underlying stream (see ).
Gets the number of bytes in the stream (compressed bytes).
Gets the number of bytes that were compressed into the stream (uncompressed bytes).
Always returns True.
Always returns False.
Always returns False.
Gets the length of the compressed stream if it is known (or -1 if the
length of the compressed stream is unknown).
Gets the position within the stream (read-only).
No Compression.
Low compression, highest speed.
Highest compression, low speed.
High compression, high speed.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream should be compatible with zip files.
Streams in zip files are different from regular zlib streams in two aspects:
(1) zip streams do not contain any local header information (the information is stored in the zip file headers instead) and
(2) zip streams use a CRC32 checksum instead of the adler32 checksum used by zlib streams.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Include header information in compressed stream (should be False for streams in zip files).
Include CRC32 checksum in compressed stream (should be True for streams in zip files).
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Compression level to use when compressing data.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Compression level to use when compressing data.
Specifies whether the compressed stream should be compatible with zip files.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Output stream that will contain the compressed data.
Compression level to use when compressing data.
Include header information in compressed stream (should be False for streams in zip files).
Include CRC32 checksum in compressed stream (should be True for streams in zip files).
Not supported.
Not supported.
Not supported.
Writes a sequence of bytes to the current stream and advances the current
position within this stream by the number of bytes written.
An array of bytes. This method copies bytes from
to the current stream.
The zero-based byte offset in at which to begin copying bytes to the current stream.
The number of bytes to be written to the current stream.
The data is compressed as it is written into the stream. Writing bytes
into the stream will usually advance the position by a number smaller than .
Clears all buffers for this stream and causes any buffered data to be written to the underlying
stream.
Closes the current stream compressor and flushed any pending data into the base stream.
If the property is set to True (the default value),
then this method also closes the base stream and releases any resources (such as sockets
and file handles) associated with it.
Writes a byte to the current position in the stream and advances the position within the stream by one byte.
Value to be written to the stream.
Gets the underlying stream that receives the compressed data.
Gets or sets whether calling the method will also
close the underlying stream (see ).
Gets the checksum value used to check the integrity of the stream.
The checksum used may be an Adler or crc32 value depending on how
the was created.
Gets the number of bytes in the stream (compressed bytes).
Gets the number of bytes that were compressed into the stream (uncompressed bytes).
Gets the ZStream instance wrapped by this .
This property is useful only in advanced applications that need to customize
the low-level behavior of the compressor. It is not needed in common applications.
Always returns False.
Always returns True.
Always returns False.
Returns the length of the underlying stream, in bytes.
Gets the position within the stream (read-only).
Provide localization for error messages in Japanese.
ZipEntryStreamWriter
Extends C1ZStreamWriter to provide the following:
1) Creates a memory or temporary storage stream.
2) Keeps track of the parent zip file.
3) Overrides Close to add the compressed stream to the zip file.
Interface ICheckSum
implemented by the Adler32 and CRC32 objects.
Adler32 is a faster checksum used by the native ZLib
CRC32 is the default checksum used in ZIP files
Summary description for CRC32.
methods are called Adler to keep zlib source code
Summary description for Deflate.
Summary description for InfBlocks.
Summary description for InfCodes.
Summary description for Inflate.
Summary description for InfTree.
Summary description for StaticTree.
Summary description for Tree.
No error.
End of stream detected.
A preset dictionary is needed at this point.
File error.
Stream structure is inconsistent (input/output buffers are null for example).
Input data is corrupted (wrong format or checksum).
Not enough memory.
No progress possible or no room in output buffer.
Incompatible ZLIB version.
Input buffer.
Position of cursor into input buffer.
Number of bytes available in the input buffer.
Total number of input bytes read so far.
Output buffer.
Position of cursor into the output buffer.
Number of free bytes remaining in output buffer.
Total number of bytes output so far.
Description of the last error (null if no errors).
Current checksum value (Adler or CRC32).
Initializes a new instance of the ZStream class using an Adler checksum.
Initializes a new instance of the ZStream class.
True to use a CRC32 checksum, False to use an Adler checksum.
CRC32 checksums are the standard used in zip files. Adler checksums are the default
used by ZLIB. Adler checksums are faster to calculate, but are not compatible with the zip format.
Initializes the internal stream state for decompression.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
The fields and must be
initialized before by the caller.
inflateInit does not perform any decompression apart from reading the
zlib header if present: data decompression is done by the
method. Therefore, the next_in and avail_in may be modified, but
next_out and avail_out are unchanged.
Initializes the internal stream state for decompression.
Size of the LZ77 sliding compression window in bits (the default value is 15 bits).
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Decompresses as much data as possible until the input buffer is exhausted or
the output buffer is full.
How to flush data into the output buffer (default value is 2).
Z_OK if some progress has been made (more input processed or more output produced),
Z_STREAM_END if the end of the compressed data has been reached and all
uncompressed output has been produced,
Z_NEED_DICT if a preset dictionary is needed at this point,
Z_DATA_ERROR if the input data was corrupted (input stream not conforming to
the zlib format or incorrect checksum),
Z_STREAM_ERROR if the stream structure was inconsistent (for example if
next_in or next_out was null),
Z_MEM_ERROR if there was not enough memory,
Z_BUF_ERROR if no progress is possible or if there was not enough room in the
output buffer when Z_FINISH is used.
inflate performs one or both of the following actions:
1. Decompress more input starting at next_in and update next_in
and avail_in accordingly. If not all input can be processed (because there
is not enough room in the output buffer), next_in is updated and processing
will resume at this point for the next call to inflate.
2. Provide more output starting at next_out and update next_out
and avail_out accordingly. inflate provides as much output as
possible, until there is no more input data or no more space in the output buffer.
Before the call to inflate, the application should ensure that at least one of the
actions is possible, by providing more input and/or consuming more output, and
updating the next_* and avail_* values accordingly.
If inflate returns Zero and avail_out == 0, it must be called again
after making room in the output buffer because there might be more output pending.
The application can consume the uncompressed output when it wants, for example when
the output buffer is full (avail_out == 0), or after each call of inflate.
This method may introduce some output latency (reading input without producing
any output) except when forced to flush.
Frees all dynamically allocated data structures for this stream,
discards any unprocessed input, and does not flush any pending output.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Skips invalid compressed data until a full flush point is found,
or until all available input is skipped. No output is provided.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Initializes the decompression dictionary from the given uncompressed byte sequence.
Data in the dictionary.
Number of bytes in the dictionary.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
This method must be called immediately after a call of
if this call returned Z_NEED_DICT. The dictionary chosen by the compressor
can be determined from the Adler32 value returned by this call to inflate.
The compressor and decompressor must use exactly the same dictionary
(see the method).
Initializes the internal stream state for compression.
Compression level between zero and nine (0-9).
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Compression level 1 gives best speed, 9 gives best compression.
Compression level zero gives no compression at all (the input data is simply copied a block at a time).
The default compression level is 6, which provides a compromise between speed and compression.
Initializes the internal stream state for compression.
Compression level between zero and nine (0-9).
Size of the LZ77 sliding compression window in bits (the default value is 15 bits).
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Compression level 1 gives best speed, 9 gives best compression.
Compression level zero gives no compression at all (the input data is simply copied a block at a time).
The default compression level is 6, which provides a compromise between speed and compression.
Compresses as much data as possible, and stops when the input buffer becomes empty or the
output buffer becomes full.
Non-zero to force some data to be flushed into the output buffer.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
deflate performs one or both of the following actions:
1. Compress more input starting at next_in and update next_in and
avail_in accordingly. If not all input can be processed (because there is not
enough room in the output buffer), next_in and avail_in are updated and
processing will resume at this point for the next call to deflate.
2. Provide more output starting at next_out and update next_out and
avail_out accordingly. This action is forced if the parameter is
non zero. Forcing flush frequently degrades the compression ratio, so this parameter
should be set only when necessary (in interactive applications). Some output may be
provided even if flush is not set
This method may introduce some output latency (reading input without producing
any output) except when forced to flush.
If deflate returns with avail_out == 0, this method must be called
again with the same value of the parameter and more output space
until the flush is complete (deflate returns with avail_out != 0).
Frees all dynamically allocated data structures for this stream,
discards any unprocessed input, and does not flush any pending output.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
Dynamically updates the compression level and compression strategy.
Compression level between zero and nine (0-9).
Compression strategy (0-2).
Initializes the compression dictionary from the given byte sequence without
producing any compressed output.
Data in the dictionary.
Number of bytes in the dictionary.
Zero on success, an error code on failure.
This method must be called immediately after ,
before any call to .
The compressor and decompressor must use exactly the same dictionary
(see ).
The exception that is thrown when reading or writing to a compressed stream fails.
Represents horizontal scroller of .
Base class for scroller.
Gets or sets the value to be added to or subtracted from the Value property when the scroll box is moved a small distance.
Gets or sets the value to be added to or subtracted from the Value property when the scroll box is moved a large distance.
Gets or sets a numeric value that represents the current position of the scroll box on the scroll bar control.
Gets or sets the Maximum value for scroller.
Gets or sets Minimum value of the scroller.
Gets or sets the mode of this scroller.
Gets or sets visibility option for .
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to show scroll bar arrows.
Gets or sets a value indicating the alignment of scroll buttons.
PanelBehaviorSettings.Hscroller.ButtonAlign
Gets or sets the increase button offset.
Gets or sets the decrease button offset.
Gets or sets the increase button offset.
Gets or sets the decrease button offset.
Gets or sets the hover edge span.
Gets or sets the horizontal scrollbar location.
Gets or sets the horizontal scroll button location.
Represents vertical scroller of .
Gets or sets the vertical scroll bar location.
Gets or sets the vertical scroll button location.
Contains three visibility options for scroll bar or scroll button.
Always hidden.
Always visible.
Appear when needed.
Contains scroll mode that could be used in .
Use scroll bar to do scrolling.
Click on scroll buttons to do scrolling.
Hover on scroll buttons to do scrolling.
Hover on panel inner edge to do scrolling.
Contains position option for vertical scrollbar.
Places vertical scrollbar at left side.
Places vertical scrollbar at right side.
Contains position option for horizontal scrollbar.
Places horizontal scrollbar at left side.
Places horizontal scrollbar at right side.
Contains position option for scroll button.
Place scroll buttons to start side.
Place scroll buttons to two sides.
Place scroll buttons to end side.
Contains position option for horizontal scroll button.
Place horizontal scroll buttons to the top.
Place horizontal scroll buttons in the middle.
Place horizontal scroll buttons to the bottom.
Contains position option for vertical scroll button.
Place vertical scroll buttons to the left.
Place vertical scroll buttons in the center.
Place vertical scroll buttons to the right.
Super Panel behavior settings.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The c.
Gets the owner.
The owner.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether allow to resize.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to use custom scroll bar.
Gets or sets the duration of the animation.
Gets or sets the animation easing.
Gets settings for horizontal scroller.
Gets settings for vertical scroller.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to show drop shadow.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to display panel rounder.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether C1SuperPanel has mouse wheel support.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to bubble scrolling event when scrollbars reach bounds.
Gets or sets the key down interval.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether C1SuperPanel provides keyboard support.
Gets or sets the client function to all when initialized.
Gets or sets the on function to call when scrolling ends.
Gets or sets the on function to call when scrolling starts.
Gets or sets the on function to call when C1SuperPanel is resized.
Gets or sets the on function to call when dragging is end.
Gets or sets the enable state of the C1SuperPanel.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the content of C1SuperPanel can be dragged to scrolling when mousedown.
Represents a control.
Initialize a new instance of .
Initialize a new instance of .
Adds the control.
The Control to add to SuperPanel.
Raises the Control.Init event.
e: An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Called by the ASP.NET page framework to notify server controls that use composition-based implementation to create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified .
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Raises the System.Web.UI.Control.PreRender event.
An System.EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Renders the control to the specified HTML writer.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the control content.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
A that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Gets visual style CSS class name.
Full CSS class name.
Processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
LoadDialogPropertiesFromJsonData
Hash table
GetScriptReferences override.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Gets the panel behavior settings for the C1SuperPanel control.
Template for into which user could drag controls.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web server control.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
Returns a string array with embedded visual style names.
Gets or sets the width of SuperPanel.
A that represents the width of the control. The default is .
The width of the Web server control was set to a negative value.
Gets or sets the height of SuperPanel.
A that represents the height of the control. The default is .
The height was set to a negative value.
Gets or sets the enable state of the C1SuperPanel.
true if control is enabled; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether C1SuperPanel will maintain the scroll position on postback.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to apply visual style to children C1Controls.
Represents C1SuperPanelExtender.
C1SuperPanelExtender will use a C1SuperPanel to wrap the target control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Renders the specified writer.
The writer.
Raises the event.
The instance containing the event data.
Gets the script descriptors.
The target control.
Gets the script references.
Gets the panel behavior settings for the C1SuperPanelExtender control.
Gets or sets the width.
Gets or sets the height.
Gets or sets the visual style name used by the control.
If this value is empty then visual style will be not rendered.
Default value is "ArcticFox".
Returns a string array with embedded visual style names.
Constructor.
Serial Object.
Constructor.
Serializes the C1ToolTip control.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipSerializer class.
Serializable Object.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipSerializer class.
Represents a C1ToolTip in an ASP.NET Web page.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTip class.
Override OnPreRender method.
System.EventArgs is the base class for classes containing event data.
Renders the contents of the control to the specified writer. This method is used primarily by control developers.
An that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered to the specified HtmlTextWriterTag.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Override CreateChildControls method.
Renders HTML structure for this control.
An HTMLTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the ScriptDescriptor objects for the control.
An enumeration of ScriptDescriptor objects.
When overridden in a derived class, registers the script libraries for the control.
An object that implements the IEnumerable interface and that contains
ECMAScript (JavaScript) files that have been registered as embedded resources.
AjaxUpdate event.
Saves the control layout properties to the file.
The file where the values of the layout properties will be saved.
Saves control layout properties to the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be saved.
Loads control layout properties from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Load control layout properties from the stream.
The stream where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
Loads control layout properties with specified types from the file.
The file where the values of layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
Loads the control layout properties with specified types from the stream.
The stream where the values of the layout properties will be loaded.
The layout types to load.
The property should be hidden.
The property should be hidden.
Gets or sets the animation effect that will be shown.
Gets or sets the length of time, in milliseconds, the animation appears.
Determines the length of the delay, in milliseconds, before the tooltip starts to appear.
Gets or sets the transition effect for the animation that is shown.
Determines whether the animation effect can be seen.
Determines how long, in milliseconds, the animation effect is hidden.
Determines how long, in milliseconds, before the tooltips disappears.
Specifies the transition for Hide animation.
Gets or sets the behavior of the C1ToolTip when it is closed.
Gets or sets which side the callout will show.
Gets or sets the offset of the callout.
Define how long (in milliseconds) the animation of the callout will run.
The easing that is applied to the callout animation.
this property should be hidden
Gets or sets the delay, in milliseconds, before the C1ToolTip is automatically closed.
Determines whether the C1ToolTip appears for all elements with a 'Title' property to give your page a clean, consistent look.
Gets or sets the height of .
Determines whether a C1ToolTip is modal.
Determines whether the C1ToolTip will follow the mouse movement.
Gets or sets the tooltip's horizontal offset from the target control.
Gets or sets the tooltip's vertical offset from the target control.
Gets or sets the position of the C1ToolTip relative to the target element.
Gets or sets the item that the C1ToolTip should appear relative to: Element, Mouse, or BrowserWindow.
Gets or sets whether the tooltip appears in a callout box. If False, the tooltip appears in a label.
Gets or sets the client event, such as OnMouseOver, that makes the tooltip appear.
Gets or sets the list of TargetControl objects that will be tooltipified.
Gets the scroll setting for the tooltip.
Gets or sets the template for the content area of the C1ToolTip control.
Gets or sets the content text of the control.
Gets or sets the title of the control.
Gets or sets the element whose children will be tooltipified.
Gets the UpdatePanel which template control will be added in.
If True, then the control will use the visual style embedded in the control's assembly. Otherwise, the control will load the visual style from the disk.
Returns string array with embedded visual style names.
Gets or sets whether the tooltip will open automatically when the page is loaded.
Gets or sets the visual style shown.
Gets or sets the path where the visual styles are located.
Gets or sets the width of the C1ToolTip.
Fires on the client side before the C1ToolTip is hidden.
Fires on the client side before the C1ToolTip is shown.
Fires on the client side when the C1ToolTip is hidden.
Fires on the client side when the C1ToolTip is shown.
Gets the value that corresponds to this Web
server control.
Fires when there is an update on AJAX.
Represents the C1ToolTipTargetControl of C1ToolTip.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControl class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControl class.
ClientID of the TargetControl.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControl class.
ClientID of the TargetControl.
whether update on ajax.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControl class.
ClientID of the TargetControl.
Value of the TargetControl.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControl class.
ClientID of the TargetControl.
Value of the TargetControl.
whether update on ajax.
Gets or sets an ID for the control that will show the C1ToolTip.
Gets or sets the value of the C1ToolTipTargetControl.
Determines whether there is an update on AJAX.
Represents a collection of Target control objects that are used by the TargetControl property.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipTargetControlCollection class.
The specified C1ToolTip object.
Removes all the C1ToolTipTargetControls from the collection.
Adds a new TargetControl to the end of the list of C1ToolTipTargetControls.
Adds a new TargetControl to the end of the list of C1ToolTipTargetControls.
Adds a new TargetControl to the end of the list of C1ToolTipTargetControls.
Adds a new TargetControl to the end of the list of C1ToolTipTargetControls.
Adds a new TargetControl to the end of the list of C1ToolTipTargetControls.
Inserts a C1ToolTipTargetControl item at the specified position in the collection.
Position, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Inserts a C1ToolTipTargetControl item at the specified position in the collection.
Position, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Inserts a C1ToolTipTargetControl item at the specified position in the collection.
Position, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Inserts a C1ToolTipTargetControl item at the specified position in the collection.
Position, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Inserts a C1ToolTipTargetControl item at the specified position in the collection.
Position, value should be mayor or equal to 0
Removes specified C1ToolTipTargetControl item from the list.
Removes the C1ToolTipTargetControl item from the list using its index.
Gets a Boolean value to determine whether the C1ToolTipTargetControlCollection is empty.
Specifies the side of the callout.
The callout will show at the auto position.
The callout will show at the top side of the tooltip.
The callout will show at the right side of the tooltip.
The callout will show at the bottom side of the tooltip.
The callout will show at the left side of the tooltip.
Specifies the behavior of the C1ToolTip when it is closed.
The tooltip will close automatically.
The tooltip will close when the close button is clicked.
The tooltip will close when the mouse is moved outside of the tooltip border.
The tooltip will always show.
Specifies the position of the tooltip relative to the target element.
This is the default value. The tooltip is shown centered (with respect to the element height) and to the right of the element. If the browser edge is too close to the tooltip, then the tooltip will appear centered (with respect to the element height) to the left of the element.
The tooltip is shown above the target element and to its left.
The tooltip is centered above the target element.
The tooltip is shown above the target element and to its right.
The tooltip is shown centered (with respect to the element height) and to the left of the target element.
The tooltip is centered over the target element.
The tooltip is shown centered (with respect to the element height) and to the right of the target element.
The tooltip is shown below the target element and to its left.
The tooltip is centered below the target element.
The tooltip is shown below the target element and to its right.
Determines whether the tooltip will appear relative to an element, the mouse, or the browser window.
The tooltip appears relative to the element.
The tooltip appears relative to the mouse.
The tooltip appears relative to the browser window.
Specifies the client event on which the tooltip will be made visible for the target element.
The tooltip is shown when the user mouses over the element.
The tooltip is shown when the user clicks the element.
The tooltip is shown when the element receives focus.
The tooltip is shown when the user right-clicks the element.
The tooltip is shown on the FromCode event.
C1ToolTipEventArgs is used by the AjaxUpdate events.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipEventArgs class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipEventArgs class.
Initializes a new instance of the C1ToolTipEventArgs class.
Gets or sets an ID for the control that will show the C1ToolTip.
Gets or sets the value.
Gets or sets the UpdatePanel of the C1ToolTip.
Represents the C1ToolTip method that will handle an event.
The source of the event
C1ToolTipEventArgs object that contains the event data
Class that represents the infomation of the uploaded file.
Create an new instance of C1FileInfo.
Gets the file stream.
Deletes the file from the temp folder.
Saves the file to a specified path.
The target path to save to.
Saves the file to a specified path.
The target path to save to.
Whether to overwrite the existing file.
Gets the HTTP MIME type of the output stream.
Gets the name of the uploaded file.
Gets the file extension of the uploaded file.
Gets the file size.
Gets the full path of the temporary file.
Represents a collection of C1FileInfo.
Create a new instance of C1FileInfoCollection.
Adds a C1FileInfo to this collection.
The C1FileInfo object to add.
The added position.
Inserts a C1FileInfo to this collection.
The position to insert.
The C1FileInfo object to insert.
Removes the C1FileInfo from this collection.
The C1FileInfo object to remove.
Test whether the C1FileInfo is contained in this collection.
The C1FileInfo to test.
True if exists.
Gets the index of the object.
The object to test.
The index of this object.
Indexer of this collection.
Represents a Upload control.
Creates an instance of C1Upload class.
Raises the Load event.
The EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Fires the ValidatingFile event.
ValidateFileEventArgs that contains the event data.
Occurs when there already exist a file with the same name.
Fires the FileExists event.
UploadedFileEventArgs that contains the event data.
Fires the Uploaded event.
EventArgs that contains the event data.
Gets a collection of script descriptors that represent ECMAScript (JavaScript) client components.
Registers the script libraries for the control.
LoadPostData.
RaisePostDataChangedEvent.
Adds HTML attributes and styles that need to be rendered.
A HtmlTextWriter that represents the output stream to render HTML content on the client.
Create any child controls they contain in preparation for posting back or rendering.
Gets the CSS class name for the control.
Raises the PreRender event.
An EventArgs object that contains the event data.
Sends server control content to a provided System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object,
which writes the content to be rendered on the client.
The System.Web.UI.HtmlTextWriter object that receives the server control content.
RenderContents override
HtmlTextWriter
Defines names of the visual styles what embeded into control's assembly.
Gets or sets a value indicate if a C1Upload control is enabled.
Gets or sets the text displayed in the [Add File] button.
Gets or sets the text displayed on the [Add File] button.
Gets or sets the tooltip displayed above the [Add File] button.
Gets or sets the tooltip displayed above the [Add File] button.
Gets or sets the text displayed on the [Upload] button.
Gets or sets the tooltip displayed above the [Upload] button.
Gets or sets the text displayed on the [Cancel] button.
Gets or sets the tooltip displayed above the [Cancel] button.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether displaying tooltip above the file place holder.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether displaying tooltip above the file place holder.
Gets or sets the trigger options to start uploading.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether an empty place holder is displayed when there is no file selected yet.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether only the file name or the full path is displayed.
Array of the allowed file extensions.
Array of the allowed mime types.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether to reset the file input list automatically after uploading is completed.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether the built-in progress bar is displayed.
Gets or sets the string format for the built-in progress text.
Gets or sets the maximum number of files to be uploaded.
Gets or sets the maximum upload size to allow in KB.
Gets or sets the text displayed on empty place holder.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed before a new fileinput is added to a C1Upload instance.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed after a new fileinput is added to a C1Upload instance.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which the progress data is updated.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed before a file input is deleted from a C1Upload instance.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed after a file input is deleted from a C1Upload instance.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed when the upload starts.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed when the upload ends.
Gets or sets the name of the client-side function which will be executed when error happens.
Gets or sets a value that determines whether to overwrite existing files in the destination folder.
Gets or sets the update interval value for progress checking.
Gets or sets the local folder in which to place temporary upload files.
Gets or sets the virtual path of the folder where C1Upload will automatically save the valid files after the upload completes.
Gets or sets the physical path of the folder where C1Upload will automatically save the valid files after the upload completes.
Gets the collection of C1FileInfo that do not follow the requirements..
Gets the collection of C1FileInfo.
Occurs when validating the uploaded file.
Occurs when the entire upload is completed.
Unique ID that identify the upload session.
Enums that define the opportunity to start uploading.
Start uploading when clicking the [Upload] button.
Start upload when selecting a file.
Never start uploading, allow user to upload by calling the client side Upload() method.
When Never is used, [Upload] button is hidden automatically.
Provides data for FileExists event.
The C1FileInfo that contains data about the uploaded file.
Represents the method that will handle FileExists event.
The source of the event.
A UploadedFileEventArgs that contains the event data.
Provides data for ValidatingFile event.
Gets or sets whether the specified C1FileInfo passed validation.
Represents the method that will handle ValidatingFile event.
The source of the event.
A ValidateFileEventArgs that contains the event data.
HttpModule for C1Upload.
Class that wraps the data of the uploading progress.
Constructor of the UploadProgress.
The upload session.
Gets a value that indicates whether the session is active.
Gets the recieved bytes.
Gets the total bytes.
Gets the current upload file.
Gets the progress value ranging from 0.0 to 1.0;
Gets the ellapsed time in second.
Gets the remaining time in second.
Gets the upload speed.
IHttpHandler for retrieving the progress data from client side.
This class is not proposed to be used by user.
Constructor of UploadProgressHandler class.
Enables processing of HTTP Web requests by a custom HttpHandler that implements the IHttpHandler interface.
Gets a value indicating whether another request can use the IHttpHandler instance.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
The designated file types on the validity
The specified file name.
Return a bool value.
Gets file array.
Return a array.
Match the image file.
The specified FileInfo object.
Return a bool value.
Gets directory array.
Return a array.
Load files.
Load files.
Page
C1EditorTemplateDialog constructor.
Gets App path.
Return a string.
Match the image file.
The specified FileInfo object.
Return a bool value.
Gets App url.
Return a string.
Gets file array.
Return a array.
Load files.
load string
Page
Helper method to save the value of a template. This sets up all the right Undo state.
Simple class to use for template instantiation
Use the members of this enumeration to display the position of the buttons.
Indicates that buttons are not visible.
Show the buttons at the right.
Show the buttons at the left.
Popup position of the C1Calendar control.
Current popup position of the C1Calendar control.
Popup C1Calendar at left side of the C1DateInput control.
Popup C1Calendar at right side of the C1DateInput control.
Popup C1Calendar above of the C1DateInput control.
Popup C1Calendar under C1DateInput control.
Type of object that is used to get and set the Value
property by C1NumericInput control.
Represents the method that will handle the TextChanged event of the control.
Source of the event.
The EventArgs that contains the event data.
Represents the method that will handle the DateChanged event of the control.
Source of the event.
The EventArgs that contains the event data.
Represents the method that will handle the ValueChanged event of the control.
Source of the event.
The EventArgs that contains the event data.
The encapsulates the data source.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Initializes a new instance of the class
with the specified data source and data member values.
The object to use as data source.
The data member name.
Adds an existing item to the internal list.
The to add.
The position into which the new element was inserted.
Adds a new item to the underlying list.
The item added to the list.
Commits a pending new item to the collection.
Starts an edit operation on the specified object.
The object on which to start operation.
Applies pending changes to the underlying data source.
The object on which to apply pending changes.
Sorts the data source with the specified sort description or descriptions.
Sorts the data source using the specified property descriptor and sort direction.
Removes all elements from the list.
Determines whether an object is an item in the list.
The to locate.
True if the is found in the list;
otherwise, false.
Copies the contents of the to the specified array,
starting at the specified index value.
The one-dimensional that is the
destination of the elements copied from .
The must have zero-based indexing.
The zero-based index in the array at which the copying begins.
Releases all resources used by the .
True if managed resources should be disposed;
otherwise, false.
Searches for the index of the item that has the given property descriptor.
The
to search on.
The value of the property parameter to search for.
The index of the item that has the given
.
Returns the index of the item in the list with the specified property name and value.
The property name to search on.
The value of the property parameter to search for.
The index of the item in the list with the specified property name and value.
Retrieves an enumerator for the .
An object that can
be used to iterate through the collection.
Retrieves an array of PropertyDescriptor objects representing
the bindable properties of the data source list type.
An array of
objects to find in
the collection as bindable. This can be null.
The
that represents the properties on each item used to bind data.
Gets the name of the list supplying data for the binding.
An array of
objects, the list name for which is returned. This can be null.
The name of the list.
Searches for the specified object and returns the index of the first
occurrence within the entire list.
The to index.
The index of value if found in the list; otherwise, -1.
Inserts an item into the list at the specified index.
The zero-based index at which
value should be inserted.
The to insert.
Removes the specified item from the list.
The to remove.
Removes the item at the specified index in the list.
The zero-based index of the item to remove.
Removes the filter associated with the .
Removes the sort associated with the .
Reinitializes the property.
Causes a control bound to the to reread
all the items in the list and refresh their displayed values.
The value specifying
whether the metadata has been changed.
Causes a control bound to the to re-read
the item at the specified index, and refresh its displayed value.
The zero-based index of item to re-read.
Gets a value indicating whether items in the underlying list can be edited.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the method
can be used to add items to the list.
Gets a value indicating whether items can be removed from the underlying list.
Gets the total number of items in the underlying list.
Gets or sets the specific list in the data source to which
the connector currently binds to.
Gets or sets the data source that the connector binds to.
Gets or sets the expression used to filter which rows are viewed.
Gets a value indicating whether the underlying list has a fixed size.
Gets a value indicating whether the underlying list is read-only.
Gets a value indicating whether the items in the underlying list are sorted.
Gets a value indicating whether access to the collection is synchronized (thread safe).
Gets or sets the list element at the specified index.
The zero-based index of the element to get or set.
Gets the list that the connector is bound to.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether events should be raised.
Gets or sets the column names used for sorting, and the sort order
for viewing the rows in the data source.
Gets the collection of sort descriptions applied to the data source.
Gets the direction the items in the list are sorted.
Gets the that is being used for sorting the list.
Gets a value indicating whether the data source supports multi-column sorting.
Gets a value indicating whether the data source supports change notification.
Gets a value indicating whether the data source supports filtering.
Gets a value indicating whether the data source supports searching with
the Find method.
Gets a value indicating whether the data source supports sorting.
Gets an object that can be used to synchronize access to the underlying list.
Occurs before an item is added to the underlying list.
Occurs when the property value has changed.
Occurs when the property value has changed.
Occurs when the underlying list changes or an item in the list changes.
Base UITypeEditor for all dynamic enums.
Describes the action that caused a event.
One or more items were added to the collection.
One or more items were removed from the collection.
One or more items were replaced in the collection.
One or more items were moved within the collection.
The content of the collection changed dramatically.
Provides data for the event.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The list containing
changed items.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The changed item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The list containing added items.
The list containing removed items.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The list containing
changed items.
The zero-based starting index.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The changed item.
The zero-based index of the changed item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The new item.
The old item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The list containing added items.
The list containing removed items.
The zero-based starting index.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The list containing
changed items.
The new index.
The old index.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The changed item.
The new index.
The old index.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The action
that caused a event.
The new item.
The old item.
The zero-based index of the item.
Gets the action that caused the event.
Gets the list of new items involved in the change.
Gets the index at which the change occurred.
Gets the list of items affected by a Replace, Remove, or Move action.
Gets the index at which a Move, Remove, ore Replace action occurred.
The delegate type for the event handlers of the event.
The source of the event.
The
that contains the event data.
Notifies listeners of dynamic changes, such as when items get added
and removed or the whole list is refreshed.
Occurs when the collection changes.
The is the base class for all
derived collections. Supports notification.
The type of objects to keep in collection.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The list that is wrapped
by the new collection.
The is the base class for all
derived collections. Supports notification.
The type of keys in the collection.
The type of objects to keep in the collection.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The implementation of the generic interface
to use when comparing keys, or a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic)
to use the default equality comparer for the type of the key, obtained
from EqualityComparer.Default.
Gets a platform specific Color object based on its integer representation.
The byte ordering in the is ARGB, for example
the constant 0x01020304 represents the color with the following components:
A = 0x01
R = 0x02
G = 0x03
B = 0x04
Indicates whether the specified is transparent.
Represents a generic collection of mappings for properties of
derived objects to appropriate data fields.
Represents a collection of mappings for properties of the
object to the appropriate data fields.
Names of properties are keys in this collection.
The type of the objects for mapping.
It should be derived from the class
and have the default parameter-less constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Returns property name as the key for collection.
The object.
The property name.
Fills internal object derived from BasePersistableObject
with values from specified bound object.
Specifies if internalObject should raise Changed
event during this method call
Value indicating if bound object was changed by this method.
Overriding method of derived class should call the base
class's ReadObject method or fill BasePersistableObject
properties on it's own.
Fills internal object derived from BasePersistableObject
with values from specified bound object.
Specifies if internalObject should raise Changed
event during this method call
Specifies whether an object has been changed
Value indicating if bound object was changed by this method.
Overriding method of derived class should call the base
class's ReadObject method or fill BasePersistableObject
properties on it's own.
When implemented in a derived class fills boundObject
with values from specified internalObject.
object from C1Schedule collection.
object from custom data source.
Overriding method of derived class should call
the base class's WriteObject method or fill boundObject
properties on it's own.
Implementation in derived classes should return new object of type T.
New object of type T.
Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing,
or resetting unmanaged resources.
Returns object for the property.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Each object derived from is identified
by either Id or Index property.
To allow data to be correctly restored from your data sources you should specify mapping
either for the or
for the .
It makes sense in case if you bind to your data storages of Resources, Labels,
Contacts or Categories.
C1Schedule saves only Ids or Indexes of these objects in AppointmentSorage.
If there is no mapping for IdMapping or IndexMapping, C1Schedule won't be able to
identify Appointment's properties correctly in storages initialized by your data.
Returns object for the property.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Each object derived from is identified
by either Id or Index property.
To allow data to be correctly restored from your data sources you should specify mapping
either for the or
for the .
It makes sense in case if you bind to your data storages of Resources, Labels,
Contacts or Categories.
C1Schedule saves only Ids or Indexes of these objects in AppointmentSorage.
If there is no mapping for IdMapping or IndexMapping, C1Schedule won't be able to
identify Appointment's properties correctly in storages initialized by your data.
Gets the number of elements actually contained in
the object.
Gets the generic equality comparer that is used to determine equality
of keys in the collection.
Represents the method that handles the Disposed event of a component.
Gets or sets the ISite associated with the IComponent.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Fills BaseObject object with values from specified boundObject.
Fills boundObject with values from specified BaseObject object.
Appointment object.
object from custom data source/
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of the allow
the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the property
to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the memory field
which is intended to store the other properties of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the other properties of
the object to be bound to
the appropriate field in the data source.
Represents a generic collection of mappings for properties
of the derived objects to appropriate data fields.
The type of the objects for mapping.
It should be derived from the class
and have the default parameter-less constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Fills BaseObject object with values from specified boundObject.
Fills boundObject with values from specified BaseObject object.
T object.
Object from custom data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the
property of the object to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the
property of the object to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the
property of the object to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Represents a generic collection of mappings for properties of
derived objects to appropriate data fields.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Fills BaseObject object with values from specified boundObject.
Fills boundObject with values from specified BaseObject object.
Category object.
Object from custom data source.
Returns object for the
property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the
property of the object to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
Returns object for
the property of the object.
If the storage object is bound to a data source via its DataSource property,
the properties of this object allow the
property of the object to be bound to the appropriate field in the data source.
This class provides information on the mapping of the single property
of the object to the appropriate data field.
Use this ctor for simple properties that has the same types
in the internal object and in the bound object.
Use this ctor when property of bound object has to have the type other than
type of the internal object's property.
Returns the property of specified object.
Sets property of specified object to the specified value.
Gets the value determining the type of the data field
or property which can be bound to this object.
Gets or sets the value determining the name of the data field
or property to be bound to the object.
Gets the value indicating if this objects is mapped
to the data field or property.
Gets the value indicating if mapping for this property is required or optional.
Gets the value determining the name of the property
which should be mapped.
The is the storage
for objects. It allows binding to the data source
and mapping data source fields to the appointment properties.
The is the base generic component
for all storages in C1Schedule object model.
Represents a storage of objects derived from .
This component implements methods of operations over the collections of objects.
It allows the collection to be populated programmatically
or automatically by retrieving data from the data source which
is specified by the DataSource and DataMember properties.
It allows mapping of data source fields to the object properties.
The type of the objects which will be stored in the storage.
It should be derived from the class
and have the default parameter-less constructor.
The type of the collection which
will be used for mapping. It should be derived from
the class
and have the default parameter-less constructor.
Call this method each time after changing your data source
if it doesn't implement interface.
Or use BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Add
and BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Remove
instead of corresponding methods of your data source class.
Translates changes in the internal list to the Objects collection.
A
that contains the event data.
Removes object from the Objects collection.
The to remove.
Raises the event.
The
that contains the event data.
Updates ItemsMap and BasePersistableObject.BaseSourceItemMap.
should be specified if it's known (for
performance purposes), if it's null then the one will be determined
by
Indicates whether the specified collection item should be synchronized.
The object.
True if item should be synchronized; false, otherwise.
Gets a value indicating if the collection is bound to data.
Gets or sets the derived object
that allows the properties of objects maintained by the current collection
to be bound to the appropriate fields in the data source.
Gets the reference to the owning component.
This property is for internal use only.
Gets an object that contains appointment related information.
Describes the version of data in a data storage.
A new item.
A deleted item.
A changed item.
Provides data for the DataSourceItemSynchronized event.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Reference to the changed object.
Reference to the derived object.
Reference to the corresponding item in the data source.
The value.
Gets the reference to the changed object.
Gets the reference to the data source item.
Gets the reference to the derived object.
Gets the value.
The delegate type for the event handlers of the DataSourceItemSynchronized event.
The source of the event.
The
that contains the event data.
The component handles all data
operations for the scheduler control and contains specific data storages
for appointments, resources, contacts, labels and statuses,
which are used for binding different collections to the data.
The component also handles data
importing and exporting to other scheduling formats such as binary, iCal, and XML.
Clears all unbound storages. Loads default sets if any for unbound storages.
Exports the scheduler's data to a file in the specified format.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export the scheduler's data to.
The value.
Exports the scheduler's data to a stream in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the scheduler's data will be exported.
The value.
Exports the appointments' data to a file in the specified format.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export.
to be exported.
The value.
Exports the appointments' data to a stream in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
to be exported.
The value.
Imports data into the scheduler from a file of the specified format.
A value containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to a file which contains
the data to be imported into the scheduler.
The value.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream whose data is in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
The value.
Required designer variable.
Clean up any resources being used.
true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.
Required method for Designer support - do not modify
the contents of this method with the code editor.
Occurs when appointments were loaded from the file.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
The is the storage for objects.
It allows binding to the data source and mapping data source fields
to the category properties.
Gets the object that contains
category related information.
The is the storage for objects.
It allows binding to the data source and mapping data source fields
to the contact properties.
Gets the object that contains
contact related information.
The is the storage for objects.
It allows binding to the data source and mapping data source fields
to the label properties.
Gets the object
that contains label related information.
The is the storage for objects.
It allows binding to the data source and mapping data source fields
to the resource properties.
Gets the object
that contains resource related information.
The is the storage for objects.
It allows binding to the data source and mapping data sources fields
to the status properties.
Gets the object
that contains status related information.
Represents a mapping between data source and collection items and holds a cache
of source items in order as they are represented in a source list. The latter
necessary to get an instance of a deleted item.
key - source item, value - SourceCollectionItemPair,
item[int].SourceItem - the same as source.item[int]
Initialize a source items cache.
Updates the source items cache based on the specified list change action in
the specified source list.
Returns a map row affected by this change.
Indicates whether the specified index is valid.
Finished means not Reset state.
The base class for all importers/exporters in C1Schedule
Exports the scheduler's data to a file.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export the scheduler's data to.
Exports the scheduler's data to a stream.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the scheduler's data will be exported.
Exports the appointments's data to a file.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export.
A object.
Exports the appointments's data to a stream.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
A object.
Imports data into the scheduler from a file.
A value containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to a file which contains
the data to be imported into the scheduler.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
Exports the appointments's data to a stream in the XML format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream whose data is in the XML format.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
Specifies the format of the exported or imported file.
XML format (ComponentOne's own format).
iCal format according to RFC 2445.
Format specification could be found here:
http://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2445.txt
Binary format.
Exports the appointments's data to a stream in the iCal format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream whose data is in the ICal format.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
The class determines time zone properties.
The class determines time zone properties.
It can be used for conversion to/from utc times and local times and respect DST.
Gets display name of this time zone instance.
Time zone standard name.
Returns a TimeZoneInfo instance for the time zone with supplied name.
This method searches by standard, daylight and display names.
A name of the time zone to search for.
TimeZoneInfo instance if any; null otherwise.
Converts the value of the utc time to a local time in this time zone.
The UTC time to convert.
The local time.
Converts the value of the local time to UTC time.
Note that there may be different possible interpretations at the daylight time boundaries.
The local time to convert.
The UTC DateTime.
Thrown if the method failed due to missing platform support.
Copies a time zone info form the specified object into the current instance.
Initialize the _tzi member.
The Tzi data from the registry.
Gets a list of all time zones defined in the local system.
Gets a string array of display time zone names supported in the local system.
Gets the current time zone information.
The time zone's name during 'standard' time (i.e. not daylight savings).
The time zone's name during daylight savings time (DST).
The time zone's display name (e.g. '(GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US and Canada)').
Gets the standard offset from UTC as a TimeSpan.
Gets the daylight offset from UTC as a TimeSpan.
Gets the difference, in minutes, between UTC and local time.
UTC = local time + bias.
Gets the difference, in minutes, between UTC and local time (in daylight savings time).
UTC = local time + bias.
The standard Windows SYSTEMTIME structure.
The layout of the Tzi value in the registry.
The standard Win32 TIME_ZONE_INFORMATION structure.
Thanks to www.pinvoke.net.
A container for P/Invoke declarations.
Convert a local time to UTC, using the supplied time zone information.
Windows XP and Server 2003 and later only.
The time zone to use.
The local time to convert.
The resultant time in UTC.
true if successful, false otherwise.
A UTC value that specifies the date and time that this
time zone definition was last updated.
It's unknown (has value DateTime.MinValue) for time zones,
registered in the local system.
But it makes sense for time zones, imported from iCal format.
Exports the appointments's data to a stream in the XML format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream whose data is in the XML format.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
determines the type of action.
Execute local application with specified parameters.
Open specified target in default browser.
Represents an action to take when the current system time reaches
the start of the associated object.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The object.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Reconstructs action properties from an .
True if an action has been changed.
Reconstructs action properties from an .
True if an action has been changed.
Creates an XML encoding of the action properties.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Gets or sets the owning object.
Gets or sets the command string for the action.
Gets or sets parameters used when the action is invoked.
Gets or sets the value indicating
whether the action is enabled. Default value is True.
Gets or sets the value determining
the type of action that will occur. Default value is ActionTypeEnum.ExecuteApplication.
The is a collection of all objects
that represents the reminders for all pending items.
Initialize new object.
Overrides default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to insert.
Overrides default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item to remove.
Overrides default behavior.
Method to be called when it is time to execute action.
Releases all unmanaged resources.
Determines the type of the object.
Represents a standard (non-recurring) appointment.
Represents the appointment which serves as the pattern
for the other recurring appointments.
The pattern for recurring appointments is specified via
the Appointment.Recurrence property.
Represents one of recurring appointments whose pattern appointment
is specified via the Appointment.Recurrence property.
Represents a recurring appointment, which was changed
and now doesn't satisfy the pattern of the recurring series.
Represents a recurring appointment, which was deleted
and now doesn't satisfy the pattern of the recurring series.
Determines the importance of the object.
Low
Normal
High
Determines the sensitivity of the object.
Confidential
Normal
Personal
Private
The object is a meeting, a one-time appointment,
or a recurring appointment or meeting in the C1Schedule.
The class includes properties
that specify meeting details such as the location and time.
The is a base class for persistable objects.
Overrides the default behavior.
The property name.
Creates new BasePersistableObject object.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
A method called when serializing.
The
to populate with data.
The context information about the source or destination
of the serialization.
Brings the object in edit mode.
A corresponding item from a data source will not be updated on this object's
property changes while the object is in edit mode. Data synchronization will
be performed when the method will be called.
Finishes edit mode started by the method and
updates a corresponding data source item.
Discards changes since the last call.
WARNING: don't call this method! This a special method that must be called
from the BaseStorage.SetCollectionItemBaseItem method only!
Loads an object from the specified .
An which contains the object data.
Returns true if object has been changed.
Loads an object from the specified .
An which contains the object data.
Returns true if object has been changed.
Saves an object to the specified .
The that will receive
the object data.
Loads an object from the specified .
The that contains the object data.
Returns true if object has been changed.
Saves an object to the specified .
The that contains the object data.
Gets an array of objects representing the key of the .
In the current version, the array always contains a single object.
It can be either an or value depending on
which one is actually used for binding this data.
For example, if you bind AppointmentStorage to the database and set
IndexMapping, this property will return an value.
If you set IdMapping, this property will return a value.
In future versions working with compound keys might be implemented.
In such case this property will return array of objects composing the key.
Unique value for serialization purposes.
User can specify mapping either for Id property or for Index property
(depending on his database structure or object model).
In unbound mode or if user doesn't specify mapping for any of these properties,
Index will contain index of the object in containing collection.
Indicates whether the object is in edit mode,
which is started using the method.
Keeps a reference to a data source item that this object is based on.
A null value means that there is no base source item.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Creates an appointment with default properties.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified parameters.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the appointment.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified parameters.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the duration of the appointment.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified parameters.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the appointment.
The value which contains
the subject of the appointment.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified parameters.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the duration of the appointment.
The value which contains
the subject of the appointment.
Prevents the object from being updated until
the method is called.
The and methods
are designed to implement batch modifications.
This allows you to prevent generation of change notifications
when changing multiple settings at the same time.
To do this enclose the code that changes the properties in calls to these methods.
Each call to must be paired with a call to .
To ensure that is always called even if an exception occurs,
wrap any calls to these methods in a try...finally statement.
Unlocks the object after a call
to the method and causes an immediate update.
The value determining
if change notifications can be generated when applying changes.
Removes the recurrence settings and restores
the state for an appointment.
Returns the object that represents
the recurrence attributes of an appointment.
If there is no existing recurrence pattern, a new
empty object is returned.
The object.
Creates the copy of the object.
The new instance.
Creates the copy of the object.
The new instance.
Copies properties from the specified object to this one.
The instance to copy.
Specifies whether to copy internal keys.
Set includeKeys to true if you want to receive exact copy
of the specified object.
Set includeKeys to false in order to copy only descriptive
properties to other object (for example,
if you want to duplicate appointment from one day to another).
Copies RecurrencePattern from the specified Appointment
Deletes an appointment and removes it from
the owning collection.
Returns a time term before the appointment start; a negative value means that
appointment is expired.
A time term before the appointment starts; a negative value means
that the appointment has expired.
Saves the appointment to the specified path in the format
of the specified file format.
Required string. The path in which to save the item.
The value indicating
the file format to save.
Reconstructs appointment from an .
An
which contains the data.
True if appointment has been changed.
Reconstructs appointment from an .
An
which contains the data.
True if appointment has been changed.
Creates an XML encoding of the appointment.
The
that will receive the object data.
Reconstructs appointment properties from an .
True if appointment has been changed.
Reconstructs appointment properties from an .
True if appointment has been changed.
Creates an XML encoding of the appointment properties.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Overrides default behavior.
The property name.
Gets the reference to the parent object.
Gets or sets the value
representing the subject of the object.
Gets or sets the value representing
the body of the object.
Gets an object for the object.
Once this property is first requested, a new object
is created and assigned to the property.
The object contains information regarding
the type of action to perform as well as the command
and parameters to pass to the action.
If the action object is enabled, the action will be invoked
when the start date and time of the owning object has occurred.
Gets the object representing
the list of objects which are in conflict
with this particular appointment.
Gets the value determining if the item is
a winner of an automatic conflict resolution.
A value of false does not necessarily indicate that the item is
a loser of an automatic conflict resolution.
The item should be in conflict with another item.
If an item has its Conflicts.Count property greater than zero
and if its property is true,
it is a winner of an automatic conflict resolution.
On the other hand, if the item is in conflict and has its
property as false,
it is a loser in an automatic conflict resolution.
Gets or sets the value determining the
start date and time of the appointment.
If the property is set to true,
then the start date of the appointment is the of
the , and the start time of the appointment is 0:00.
At setting this property, if it's time is not equal 0:00,
the property will be set to false.
Gets or sets the value determining
the end date and time of the appointment.
The property is usually specified
by the and properties,
and is always calculated as = + .
When setting the property, the property
retains its value, and the is changed according
to the new value of the property.
If the new property's value is less than
the property's value, then an exception will be raised.
At setting this property, if it's time is not equal 0:00,
or value is equal to the value of property,
the property will be set to false.
Gets a value indicating either it is
a one day appointment or shares some days.
Gets or sets the value indicating the
duration of the appointment.
At setting this property, if it's value is not equal to the whole
number of days, the property will be set to false.
Gets or sets the value specifying
where the appointment is going to be.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the relative importance level for the appointment.
Default value is .
Gets or sets the value indicating
if the current appointment is an All-day appointment.
Gets the object which is associated with the appointment.
To associate an appointment with the reminder, set its
property to true.
Once this property is set to true, a new object
is created and assigned to the property.
Gets or sets the value indicating whether
a reminder is associated with the appointment.
Once this property is set to true, a new object
is created and assigned to the property.
Gets or sets the value indicating the
interval of time the reminder should occur
prior to the start of the appointment.
Gets or sets the value indicating if the associated
object has non-default settings.
True if the reminder overrides the default reminder behavior for the appointment.
You must set the property to validate
the and
the properties.
Gets or sets the value indicating if the reminder
should play a sound when it occurs for this appointment or task.
The property must be set in order to validate
the property.
This property is only valid if the property
is set to true.
Gets or sets the value indicating the path and file name
of the sound file to play when the reminder occurs for the appointment.
This property is only valid if the and
properties are set to true.
The default sound is .
Gets the value indicating if the appointment is recurring.
Gets the object that defines the recurrence
criteria for this object.
If this appointment is a not member of a recurrence,
or is itself a root appointment, null is returned.
If an appointment is recurring (see the property)
it represents an occurrence in the series that is started and defined
by a specific pattern appointment.
Use the property to obtain the pattern
of the current appointment. A pattern appointment can be recognized by its
property set
to the value.
The recurrence information defined by the pattern appointment can be accessed
via the property of the appointment.
Gets the value indicating
the recurrence state of the appointment.
Gets or sets custom information associated with this object.
This property is valid only for the lifetime of the object.
Gets or sets custom text associated with this object.
This property is serialized with other appointment properties.
It isn't used by the scheduler, use it to keep your data associated with appointment.
This property is serialized into xml and binary formats and it is saved into underlying
data source if mapping for Appointment Properties is set.
It isn't retained at export/import to iCal format.
Gets or sets the object associated with this appointment.
Labels may be associated with an appointment
to effectively group appointments.
Gets the object which holds the set of
objects for this appointment.
An appointment may be associated with multiple resources.
Gets the object which holds the set
of objects for this appointment.
An appointment may be associated with multiple contacts.
Gets or sets the object indicating the busy status
of the user for the appointment.
Gets the object which holds the set
of categories assigned to the appointment.
Categories may be associated with an appointment to effectively group appointments.
An appointment may be associated with multiple categories.
Gets the value indicating if the appointment
has not been modified since the last save.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the sensitivity level of the appointment.
Gets or sets the value determining
whether the calendar owner intends to keep the
object private.
The is a collection of all
objects in the C1Schedule component.
The is a base generic class for all collections
in C1Schedule object model.
The type of the objects which will be stored in the collection.
It should be derived from the class
and have the default parameter-less constructor.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The owning storage.
Adds a new custom object to the collection.
If the item already exists in the collection, its index is returned.
Returns the index of newly added custom object.
Check if collection contains an item with specified index.
The zero-based index of the item to locate.
True if the item is found in the collection; otherwise, false.
Call this method after removing items from the unbound storage.
Adds an array of objects to the collection.
This methods clears the collection before adding new items.
Don't use it if you want to keep preexisting items.
An array of items.
Adds an array of objects to the collection.
This methods clears the collection before adding new items.
Don't use it if you want to keep preexisting items.
An array of items.
Overrides default behavior of collection at inserting new items.
If specified item already exists in the collection generates an exception.
The zero-based index of the item to insert.
The object to insert.
Extracts the key from the specified element.
The element from which to extract the key.
The key for the specified element.
Overrides base class implementation.
The zero-based index of the item to remove.
Creates the new object
with default settings and adds it to the collection.
The object.
Creates the new object
with specified parameters and adds it to the collection.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the appointment.
The object.
Creates the new object
with specified parameters and adds it to the collection.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the duration of the appointment.
The object.
Creates the new object
with specified parameters and adds it to the collection.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the appointment.
The value which contains
the subject of the appointment.
The object.
Creates the new object
with specified parameters and adds it to the collection.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the appointment.
The value which specifies
the duration of the appointment.
The value which contains
the subject of the appointment.
The object.
Returns a specific instance of the Appointment object on the specified date.
The GetOccurrence method generates an exception if no appointment
of that series exists on the specified date.
Retrieves the object which contains
the full list of objects in the specified time interval.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the interval.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the interval.
The object.
This method will create instances of the
object for recurring appointments if they haven't been created yet.
Retrieves the object which contains
the list of occurrences of the specified master appointment
in the specified time interval.
The object
representing the master appointment.
The value which specifies
the start date and time of the interval.
The value which specifies
the end date and time of the interval.
The object.
This method will create instances of the
object for recurring appointments if they haven't been created yet.
Retrieves the object which contains
the list of occurrences of objects
which are in conflict with the specified appointment.
The object.
The object.
Clears the collection.
Overrides the default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item to remove.
Overrides the default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to insert.
Overrides the default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to set.
Adds an array of objects to the collection.
This methods clears collection before adding new items.
Don't use it if you want to save previously existed items.
An array of objects.
Occurs when RecurrenceState of an appointment is changed.
Occurs when a custom action of an appointment executes.
Occurs when an appointment was added.
Occurs when an appointment was removed.
Occurs when an appointment was changed.
Gets the reference to the owning object.
The is a sortable collection of
objects.
The is not guaranteed to be sorted.
You must sort the before performing operations
that require the to be sorted.
Sorts the elements in the entire AppointmentList using the default comparer
(by the Appointment.Start value).
Sorts the elements in the entire AppointmentList using
the specified System.Comparison.
The
to use when comparing elements.
Sorts the elements in the entire AppointmentList using
the specified comparer.
The IComparer{Appointment} implementation to use
when comparing elements, or a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic)
to use the default comparer.
Sorts the elements in a range of elements in AppointmentList using
the specified comparer.
The zero-based starting index of the range to sort.
The length of the range to sort.
The IComparer{Appointment} implementation to use
when comparing elements, or a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic)
to use the default comparer.
Creates a copy of the list by copying items to the new list.
Compares objects by their start time.
Performs a comparison of two objects and returns
a value indicating whether the one starts earlier,
at the same time, or later than the other.
The first to compare.
The second to compare.
Less than zero - x occurs earlier than y.
Zero - x and y occur at the same time.
Greater than zero - x occurs later than y.
Returns an existing instance of class if any;
or creates a new one.
The class describes event data for events.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified appointment.
The object.
Gets the appointment which the event was raised for.
Delegate for handling the cancelable event involving a single
object.
The source of the event.
The
that contains the event data.
The class describes event data
for events.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified appointment.
The object.
Gets the object which the event was raised for.
Set to true to cancel the operation.
The is a base class for resources, labels, statuses,
categories and contacts. It implements base UI properties and persistence.
Creates the new object with default settings.
Creates the new object with specified text.
The value.
Creates the new object with specified text and menu caption.
The value.
The value.
Creates the new object with specified color,
text and menu caption.
The value.
The value.
The value.
Creates the new object with specified parameters.
The value.
The value.
The value.
The object.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Loads an object from the specified .
An
which contains the object data.
Loads an object from the specified .
An which contains the object data.
Returns true if object has been changed.
Saves an object into specified .
The
that will receive the object data.
Overrides the default behavior.
The text which identifies a user interface object.
Gets or sets the color of the user interface object.
Gets or sets the text which identifies a user interface object.
Gets or sets the menu caption for the user interface object.
Gets or sets the brush used to fill the user interface object's image.
Supported persistence only for System.Drawing.Drawing2D.HatchBrush
and System.Drawing.SolidBrush
The is a base generic class for all lists
in C1Schedule's object model.
Only objects existing in the owning collection can be added to this list.
The type of the objects which will be stored in the list.
It should be derived from the class.
Overrides default behavior of Collection.
Prevents from adding items non-existent in the parent collection.
The zero-based index of the item to insert.
The object to insert.
Overrides default behavior of Collection.
Prevents from adding items non-existent in the parent collection.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to set.
Gets the reference to the owning collection.
Determines the time interval which is used for
displaying time slots in the DayView.
5 minutes.
6 minutes.
10 minutes.
15 minutes.
20 minutes.
30 minutes.
60 minutes.
The class manages and exposes
all date-related data to C1Schedule controls.
Initializes a new instance of the component.
Returns true if specified date is not weekend or holiday.
The value to check.
True if specified date is not weekend or holiday; false - otherwise.
Copies properties from the specified object to this one.
The instance to copy.
Returns the culture-specific full name of the specified day of the week
based on the current UI culture.
Returns the culture-specific full name of the specified month based on the
current UI culture.
Returns the culture-specific full name of the specified instance based on the
current UI culture.
Returns DateTime value with filled DateTimeKind property.
DateTimeKind = DateTimeKind.Utc if string was saved using RFC1123Pattern.
Occurs when the range of selected days was changed.
Occurs when the property of object was changed.
Gets or sets the object which
holds culture-specific information used by C1Schedule components.
Gets or sets the object which
holds culture-specific information used by C1Schedule components.
Gets or sets the value determining display format
of date values to use in appointments and built-in dialogs.
The actual representation depends on the value
of the property.
Gets or sets the value determining display format
of time values to use in appointments and built-in dialogs.
The actual representation depends on the value
of the property.
Gets or sets the value determining
the first day of the week. Default is system settings.
Gets or sets the object containing the
set of working days in one week.
Gets or sets the value determining whether
the object has any working days.
Gets or sets the value specifying the time interval
which is used for displaying time slots in the DayView.
The property cannot be set to any
arbitrary value. When assigning a value to this property it is
automatically calculated so as to be equal to the nearest
value.
Gets or sets the value specifying the time interval
which is used for displaying time slots in the DayView.
Gets or sets the value specifying the beginning
of the working time.
Gets or sets the value specifying
the end of the working time.
Gets or sets the value specifying minimum date allowed.
Gets or sets the value specifying maximum date allowed.
Gets the object which holds
the list of holidays (non-working days in addition to weekends).
Gets the object which holds
the list of weekend days which should be working.
Gets or sets specifying DateTime kind
used for saving values.
This property only have an influence on the process of saving data to
the AppointmentStorage.DataSource object and on export operations.
All properties of the and
objects represent current system local time values.
Set this property to DateTimeLind.Utc if you need to save
data with universal time. In such case the data will be converted
to the local time and back at every read/write operation.
The class is a list of working days for the single week.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Creates the new object.
The array of objects.
The class represents the category which can be
associated with the object.
Creates the new object.
Creates custom object with specified text.
The text of category.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
The is a collection of
objects which represents all available categories in C1Schedule object model.
By default it contains the set of predefined categories.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Restores the collection to its default state.
The method removes all
custom categories from the collection and leaves only the standard ones.
Returns the list of predefined categories.
The object.
The is a list of objects.
Only objects existing in the owning object
may be added to this list.
Use the to associate the set of objects
with an object.
The class represents the person information.
Not real class just sample for prototyping.
Creates the new object.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
The is a collection of
objects which represents all available contacts in C1Schedule object model.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The is a list of objects.
Only objects existing in the owning object
may be added to this list.
Use the to associate the set of objects
with an object.
Represents one day in the C1Schedule.
Creates new Day object.
Collection of all days in the C1Schedule component.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Returns Day object for specified date.
Returns DayCollection for all dates from the FirstDate till the LastDate.
Returns DayCollection for all dates from the start till the end.
Returns list of Day objects for all dates from the start till the end.
Extracts the key from the specified element.
The element from which to extract the key.
The key for the specified element.
The class is a wrapper for the
instance.
At addition of the new value, it cuts off the time part of the value
and ensures that the value is not present in the list yet.
This class uses binary search for all operations.
Initializes a new instance of class.
Adds new date to the list.
The value to add.
Clears all items from the wrapped list.
Removes specified item from the wrapped list.
The value to remove.
Removes item at the specified index.
The zero-based index of the item remove to.
Returns true if specified item exists in the wrapped list.
An item to search for.
True if item exists in the wrapped list.
Returns true if either of specified items exists in the wrapped list.
An array of values to search for.
True if at least one of specified items exists in the wrapped list.
Returns true if either of specified items exists in the wrapped list.
A list of values to search for.
True if at least one of specified items exists in the wrapped list.
Returns the first item that is less than specified one.
An item to search for.
The first item that is less than specified one;
or DateTime.MinValue if such item is not found.
Returns the first item that is greater than specified one.
An item to search for.
The first item that is greater than specified one;
or DateTime.MaxValue if such item is not found.
Returns the number of items in the wrapped list.
Returns the reference to the wrapped list.
Specifies the different patterns available for brushes.
Represents transparent brush.
Represents solid brush.
A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper right to lower left.
Specifies horizontal and vertical lines that cross.
A pattern of crisscross diagonal lines.
A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper left to lower right.
A pattern of horizontal lines.
A pattern of vertical lines.
Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of tildes.
Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of zigzags.
Wrapper class for brushes. Only for serialization/deserialization purposes.
Creates the new object.
Creates the new object.
The foreground value.
The background value.
The value.
Creates a new solid object.
The background value.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Returns string representation of color in ARGB format.
The value.
The string representation of color in ARGB format
Gets or sets WinForms/WebForms specific brush object based on the C1Brush definition.
The class represents the label which can be
associated with the object.
Creates the new object with default parameters.
Creates custom object with specified text.
The text of the label.
Creates custom object with specified text and menu caption.
The text of the label.
The menu caption for displaying label in dialogs.
Creates custom object with specified color, text and menu caption.
The color of the label.
The text of the label.
The menu caption for displaying label in dialogs.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
The is a collection of
objects which represents all available labels in C1Schedule object model.
By default it contains the following set of predefined labels:
- None
- Important
- Business
- Personal
- Vacation
- Must Attend
- Deadline
- Travel Required
- Needs Preparation
- Birthday
- Anniversary
- Phone Call
It also allows adding of custom labels.
Defines Id of the None label.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Restores the collection to its default state.
The method removes all
custom labels from the collection and leaves only the standard ones.
The is a list of objects.
Only objects existing in the owning object
may be added to this list.
Determines the types of recurrent appointments.
The recurring appointment reoccurs on a daily basis.
The recurring appointment reoccurs every working day.
The recurring appointment reoccurs on a monthly basis.
The recurring appointment reoccurs every N months.
The recurring appointment reoccurs on a weekly basis.
The recurring appointment reoccurs on an yearly basis.
The recurring appointment reoccurs every N years.
Determines the set of days and groups of days for recurrence patterns.
No specific value; the actual value is obtained from
the root object.
Specifies Sunday.
Specifies Monday.
Specifies Tuesday.
Specifies Wednesday.
Specifies Thursday.
Specifies Friday.
Specifies Saturday.
Specifies Saturday and Sunday (or what ever days according
to the settings of the C1Schedule).
Specifies work days (all days except weekend).
Specifies every day of the week.
Determines the week in a month in which the appointment will occur.
The recurring appointment will occur on the specified
day or days of the first week in the month.
The recurring appointment will occur on the specified
day or days of the second week in the month.
The recurring appointment will occur on the specified
day or days of the third week in the month.
The recurring appointment will occur on the specified
day or days of the fourth week in the month.
The recurring appointment will occur on the specified
day or days of the last week in the month.
The class contains information
that describes the recurrence pattern and range
of the associated object.
Gets the human-readable description of the object
according to the specified culture.
The object used for getting calendar specific strings.
The value described the object.
Gets the human-readable description of the object
according to the specified object.
Use this method instead of property if the
object does not belong to any control.
The object used for getting calendar specific strings.
The value described the object.
If the object does not belong to the control,
its Description property will return the default description using current user culture and calendar settings.
Returns a specific instance of the Appointment object on the specified date.
CalendarInfo
The GetOccurrence method generates an exception if no appointment
of that series exists on the specified date.
Reconstructs recurrence pattern properties from an .
True if pattern has been changed.
Reconstructs recurrence pattern properties from an .
True if pattern has been changed.
Creates an XML encoding of the recurrence pattern properties.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Creates the copy of the object.
The new instance.
Gets the object which represents
the master appointment for this object.
Gets the human-readable description of the object.
Gets or sets the value
determining the type of recurrence (daily, monthly, etc.).
Default value is RecurrenceTypeEnum.Weekly.
Gets or sets the value specifying
the interval between occurrences of the recurrence.
The property works in conjunction with
the property to determine the cycle of the recurrence.
The maximum allowable value is 99 for weekly patterns and 999 for daily patterns.
The default value is 1.
For example, if the is set
to , and the is set to 3,
the recurrence will occur every third day.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the end time for the given occurrence of the recurrence pattern.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the start time for the given occurrence of the recurrence pattern.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the duration of each occurrence in the recurrence pattern.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the start date of the recurrence pattern.
Gets or sets the value indicating
the end date of the recurrence pattern.
This property is optional but must be coordinated
with other properties when setting up a recurrence pattern.
If this property or the property is set,
the pattern is considered to be finite, and the
property is false.
If neither nor is set,
the pattern is considered infinite and is true.
The property must be set before
setting .
Gets or sets the number of occurrences for the recurrence pattern.
This property allows the definition of a recurrence pattern that
is only valid for the specified number of subsequent occurrences.
For example, you can set this property to 10 for a formal training
course that will be held on the next ten Thursday evenings.
The default value is 0.
This property must be coordinated with other properties
when setting up a recurrence pattern.
If the property
or the property is set, the pattern
is considered to be finite and the property is false.
If neither nor is set,
the pattern is considered infinite and is true.
Get or sets the value specifying
the count for which the recurrence pattern is valid for a given interval.
This property is only valid for recurrences of
the and
types and allows the definition
of a recurrence pattern that is only valid for the Nth occurrence,
such as "the 2nd Sunday in March" pattern.
The default value is WeekOfMonthEnum.First.
Gets or sets the value representing the mask
for week days on which the recurring appointment occurs.
Monthly and yearly patterns are only valid for a single day.
Weekly patterns are only valid as the Or of the .
The default value is 0.
When the property is set to
, the property
can only be set to ; setting the property
to any other value will result in an exception.
When the property is set to
, the property
can only be set to ; setting the property
to any other value will result in an exception.
When the property is set to
, the property
cannot be set to ; doing so will result
in an exception being thrown.
When the property is set to
or
the property is not applicable.
Gets or sets the number of the day in its respective month on which
each occurrence will occur. Applicable only when the
property is set to
or .
The default value is 1.
Gets or sets the value indicating which month of the year is valid
for the specified recurrence pattern. Can be a number from 1 to 12.
This property is only valid for recurrence patterns whose
property is set to
or .
The default value is 1.
Gets or sets the value indicating if
the recurrence pattern is endless.
The default value is True.
This property must be coordinated with other properties when
setting up a recurrence pattern. If the property
or the property is set, the pattern is considered
to be finite and the property is false.
If neither nor is set,
the pattern is considered infinite and is true.
Gets the object which holds the list
of objects that define the exceptions to that series
of appointments. objects are added to
the whenever a property in the corresponding
object is altered.
Gets the object which holds the list
of objects removed from that series of appointments.
The class represents an object which allows users to keep track
of upcoming appointments by scheduling a pop-up dialog box to appear at a given time.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The method notifies the scheduler to defer the triggering
of a reminder by the specified interval.
The value specifying the interval
of time to wait before displaying the reminder again.
Dismisses the current object.
Gets the owning object.
Gets the value representing the window caption text
of the object which
the object is applied to.
Gets a value that determines if the object
is currently active (visible).
Gets the value indicating the next time the specified
reminder will occur.
The property value changes every time
the object's method is executed or when the user
clicks the Snooze button.
Gets the value specifying the original date and time
that the specified reminder is set to occur.
It is calculated using the following formula:
=
- .
This value corresponds to the original date and time
value before the method is executed or the user
clicks the Snooze button.
The is a collection of all objects
that represents the reminders for all pending items.
Use the property to get a reference
to the Reminders collection.
Reminders are created programmatically when a new object
is created with a reminder. For example, a reminder is created when
an object is created and the
property is set to true.
Initialize new object.
Overrides default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to insert.
Overrides default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item to remove.
Overrides default behavior.
Overrides default behavior.
The zero-based index of the item.
The object to set.
Method to be called when it is time to show reminder.
Releases all unmanaged resources.
Occurs after a reminder is added.
Occurs after a reminder has been modified.
Occurs before the reminder is executed.
Occurs when a reminder is dismissed using the Snooze button.
Occurs when a object has been removed from the collection.
A reminder can be removed from the Reminders collection
by any of the following means:
- The Reminders collection's Remove method.
- The Reminder object's Dismiss method.
- When the user clicks the Dismiss button.
- When a user turns off a meeting reminder from within the associated item.
- When a user deletes an item that contains a reminder.
Describes event data for object events.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified object.
The object.
Gets the reminder which the event was raised for.
Delegate for handling the cancelable event involving a single object.
The source of the event.
The
that contains the event data.
Describes event data for cancelable Reminder events.
Initializes a new instance of the
class with the specified object.
The object.
Gets the reminder which the event was raised for.
Set to true to cancel the operation.
The class represents the resource which can be
associated with the object.
Creates the new object.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
The is a collection of
objects which represents all available resources in C1Schedule object model.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The is a list of objects.
Only objects existing in the owning object
may be added to this list.
Use the to associate the set of objects
with an object.
Determines the type of status.
This status means that a person is in the office but unavailable to others.
This status means that a person is in the office and available to others.
This status means that a person is out of the office and unavailable to others.
This status means that a person is in the office and tentatively available to others.
This status represents all custom statuses added to the StatusCollection.
The class represents an availability status
for the object.
Creates the new custom object with default parameters.
Creates a new instance of the class
and initializes it with the specified type.
The value.
Creates a new instance of the class
and initializes it with the specified type.
The value.
The value.
Creates a new instance of the custom object with the specified text.
The value.
Creates the new custom object with specified text and menu caption.
The value.
The menu caption for displaying status in dialogs.
Creates the new custom object with specified color,
text and menu caption.
The color which will be used for displaying status.
The value.
The menu caption for displaying status in dialogs.
Creates the new custom object with specified parameters.
The color which will be used for displaying status.
The value.
The menu caption for displaying status in dialogs.
The brush which will be used for displaying status.
Special constructor for deserialization.
The .
The context information.
Gets the value determining the type of the status.
The is a collection of
objects which represents all available statuses in C1Schedule object model.
By default it contains the set of predefined statuses.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Restores the collection to its default state.
The method removes all the custom
appointment statuses from the collection and leaves only the standard ones.
Gets the object specified by the appointment status type.
For custom statuses returns the first occurrence.
If there is no such object in the collection, returns null.
The value.
The object.
The is a list of objects.
Only objects existing in the owning object
may be added to this list.
RibbonUI
DefaultCreate
Get the toolbar named 'save_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'edit_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'font_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'para_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'review_spell_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'review_inspect_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'table_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'table_edit_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'break_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'forms_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'link_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
Get the toolbar named 'special_tb'.
return C1ToolBar object.
RibbonUI class
Parent for this instance.
If is rendered for design mode.
Create a Ribbon UI for C1Editor
Parent control that contains all the children of this UI.
Create a object.
Object ID.
Toolbar css
Toolbar width(in pixcels)
Creates footer panel for .
Creates body panel for .
Create a Splitter for the control.
Get height of the group.
Create a PathSelector for the control.
GetHeaderPanel
CreateGroup
Creates tool bar panel for .
Creates ribbon group.
EditorRibbonGroup Type
Get split button.
Create a object.
ID
Text
CSS
object
Get group of C1Toolbar.
Get group of C1Toolbar.
Get button of Toolbar.
Get button of Toolbar.
Get toolbar.
Create a container for the control.
Return a control.
Create a ContextMenu for C1Editor.
The control.
Create a MenuItem for ContextMenu of C1Editor.
The specified text.
The specified LI css.
The specified Anchor css.
The control.
IsFF
Get current page.
Contains all the string constants that will be used when constructing Control hierarchy for .
Command Base class.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The control.
Executes command.
Gets the control.
The control.
The is WebControl which is used to implement
interactions between end-users and the scheduling application.
The main purpose of this control is to show the scheduled data (appointments)
on a WebForm using one of the possible data views.
It allows appointments to be created, edited and deleted,
and all other actions required by end-users to schedule their timetables
to be performed.
Initializes a new instance of the web control.
Show buttons in the navigation bar at the top of schedule view.
COMMENTED: OBSOLETE.
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets that will be use by control only at run-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
Raises the event.
An object that contains the event data.
Returns client script text for client Culture initialization
Resolve Client Url for using in browser
Saves the schedule data to local file.
Restores view-state information from a previous request that was saved
with the SaveViewState() method.
This member overrides Control.SaveViewState.
This member overrides Control.TrackViewState.
Gets ScriptDescriptors.
Gets ScriptReferences.
CreateChildControls
Create a C1Window object.
ID that will be assigned to new C1Window object.
New C1Window object
Render
Override this method if you want to render additional style sheets that will be use by control only at design-time.
Primarily this method used by control developers.
Note, stylesheet styles.css from embedded VisualStyle will be included automatically by VisualStyle mechanism.
OnPreRender.
Register client script.
Gets the human-readable description of the object
according to the specified culture.
The collection of attributes that describes unsaved
The object used for getting calendar specific strings.
The object used for management and exposition of all date-related data to C1Schedule controls.
The value described the object.
Returns the results of a callback event that targets a control.
The result of the callback.
Loads the state of the client properties.
State of the properties.
Processes a callback event that targets a control.
A string that represents an event argument to pass to the event handler.
Resolve client url or resource name.
When implemented by a class, processes postback data for an ASP.NET server control.
The key identifier for the control.
The collection of all incoming name values.
true if the server control's state changes as a result of the postback; otherwise, false.
When implemented by a class, signals the server control to notify the ASP.NET application that the state of the control has changed.
When implemented by a class, enables a server control to process an event raised when a form is posted to the server.
A that represents an optional event argument to be passed to the event handler.
Internal raise postback server events.
Gets the appointments.
The appointments.
Gets the master appointments.
The master appointments.
Gets the recurrence patterns.
The recurrence patterns.
Gets the labels.
The labels.
Gets the statuses.
The statuses.
Gets the contacts.
The contacts.
Gets the categories.
The categories.
Gets the resources.
The resources.
Gets or sets the access key that allows you to quickly navigate to the Web server control.
Automatically posts back to server if the schedule data or properties is changed.
If EnableCallback property is true then data will be sent through AJAX callbacks.
Gets ID of the client side object associated with the control.
Note ClientObjectID that equals ClientID can cause error
when control is working in Atlas UpdatePanel
Indicates DataArea scroll position for Day and WorkWeek Views. Default value is -1, means that scroll top position will be adjusted to current time slot automatically.
Gets or sets the value determining currently displayed week view layout.
Path to folder with custom dialogs.
Note if a dialog not found in this folder then control will use embedded dialogs.
Determines the set of edit options available to the end-user.
Gets or sets the value determining the way the work week option is displayed.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Web server control is enabled.
true if control is enabled; otherwise, false. The default is true.
Gets or sets the selected date.
A
that represents the selected date.
The default value is DateTime.MinValue.
Gets a collection of DateTime objects that represent
the selected dates on the C1WebSchedule control for DayView.
Gets or sets the value indicating whether the control
should show the reminder form when a reminder alerts.
Gets or sets a value indicating whether show appointment ToolTip when mouse is over appointment.
Format of text in the appointment.
{0} = Start, {1} = End, {2} = Subject, {3} = Location, {4} = Reserved(not used), {5} = body, {6} = line break.
{0:h:mmtt}-{1:h:mmtt} {2}
Gets the resolved appointment text.
The resolved appointment text.
CultureInfo object what currently used by control.
Gets the unique, hierarchically qualified identifier for the server control.
The fully qualified identifier for the server control.
Gets or sets the value determining
currently displayed view.
CultureInfo object. Each culture has different conventions
for displaying dates, time, numbers, and other
information. Neutrals cultures are not supported.
returning value can be null if Culture is not defined
Indicates whether control will use default style for empty style values.
The CalendarInfo manages and exposes date-related data to C1WebSchedule control.
Gets the C1WebScheduleStorage object.
Gets or sets a value indicating if the control should show
only working hours in a Day View.
Gets the start day time. Used by control internally.
Gets the end of working day time in minutes. Used by control internally.
Show status bar at the bottom of the schedule view.
Show navigation bar at the top of the schedule view.
Show the view selection bar at the top of the control.
Indicates how to show WeekView in Office2003 or in Office2007 style.
Filename what will be used for saving data when C1WebSchedule in not bounded to the data base.
Text that will be displayed in the navigation bar. {0} = start date. {1} = end date.
Gets or sets the width of the control.
Gets or sets the height of the control.
All height value minor than 300px will be ignored.
Fires on client side before appointment create.
Fires on client side before appointment delete.
Fires on client side before appointment update.
Fires on client side before view change.
Fires on client side before dialog open.
function C1Schedule1_OnClientBeforeDialogOpen(schedule, dialogEventArgs) {
if (dialogEventArgs.get_dialogType() == C1.Web.UI.Controls.C1Schedule.DialogType.editAppointment) {
dialogEventArgs.set_cancel(true);
var appointment = dialogEventArgs.get_appointment();
alert("Here you can provide own 'Edit Appointment' dialog for appointment with subject '" + appointment.get_subject() + "'.");
}
}
Fires on the client side after cells selection changed.
The on client cells selection changed.
Gets a reference to the System.Web.UI.Page instance that contains the server
control.
Gets ID of field used to store postback data
BeforeAppointmentCreate event. Fires before appointment create.
BeforeAppointmentDelete event. Fires before appointment delete.
BeforeAppointmentUpdate event. Fires before appointment update.
BeforeViewChange event. Fires before view change.
CustomClientCall event. Fires custom client call.
Defines names of the visual styles what embeded into control's assembly.
Primarily this property used by control developers.
The class class manages and exposes
date-related data to C1WebSchedule control.
Initializes a new instance of the object.
Format string to display dates in appointments and built-in dialogs.
Format string to display times in appointments and built-in dialogs.
The minimum date allowed.
Start of the working day.
End of the working day.
First working day.
This property is obsolete. Use StartDayTime instead of StartDateTime.
This property is obsolete. Use EndDayTime instead of EndDateTime.
The C1WebScheduleStorage implements all data operations for the
C1WebSchedule control. It does all the background work required by
the scheduling application. It contains specific data storages for appointments,
resources, contacts, Labels and statuses, which are intended for binding different
schedule views and collections to the data.
Also it implements data export and import to other scheduling applications and formats.
Load data from the specified xml file.
If C1WebScheduleStorage contains any data these data will be lost.
Saves all available data to the specified xml file.
If the file already exists it will be overwritten.
Exports the scheduler's data to a file in the specified format.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export the scheduler's data to.
The value.
Exports the scheduler's data to a stream in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the scheduler's data will be exported.
The value.
Exports the appointments' data to a file in the specified format.
A containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to export.
to be exported.
The value.
Exports the appointments' data to a stream in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream into which the appointments's data will be exported.
to be exported.
The value.
Imports data into the scheduler from a file of the specified format.
A value containing the full path
(including the file name and extension) to a file which contains
the data to be imported into the scheduler.
The value.
Imports the scheduler's data from a stream whose data is in the specified format.
A object which specifies
the stream that contains the data to import to the scheduler.
The value.
ToString
Determines whether is need save data to file.
true if data must be saved to file; otherwise, false.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
Gets the object.
ViewState
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The ap.
A prev id.
The storage.
Gets the reminder.
The reminder.
Gets the resources ids.
The resources.
Gets the categories ids.
The categories.
Gets the Contact links ids.
The links.
Gets the reminder time before start.
The reminder time before start.
Gets the reminder sound file.
The reminder sound file.
Gets the duration.
The duration.
Gets the start.
The start.
Gets the end.
The end.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets a value indicating whether this instance is changed on client.
true if this instance is changed on client; otherwise, false.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the previous id.
The previous id.
Gets a value indicating whether [all day event].
true if [all day event]; otherwise, false.
Gets the busy status.
The busy status.
Gets the body.
The body.
Gets the importance.
The importance.
Gets the label.
The label.
Gets the location.
The location.
Gets the state of the recurrence.
The state of the recurrence.
Gets a value indicating whether [reminder play sound].
true if [reminder play sound]; otherwise, false.
Gets a value indicating whether [reminder set].
true if [reminder set]; otherwise, false.
Gets the sensitivity.
The sensitivity.
Gets the subject.
The subject.
Gets a value indicating whether this is private.
true if private; otherwise, false.
Gets a value indicating whether this instance is one day.
true if this instance is one day; otherwise, false.
Gets a value indicating whether this instance is recurring.
true if this instance is recurring; otherwise, false.
Gets a value indicating whether [reminder override default].
true if [reminder override default]; otherwise, false.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The r.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the caption.
The caption.
Gets a value indicating whether this instance is active.
true if this instance is active; otherwise, false.
Gets the next reminder date.
The next reminder date.
Gets the original reminder date.
The original reminder date.
Gets the parent appointment.
The parent appointment.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The LBL.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the index.
The index.
Gets the menu caption.
The menu caption.
Gets the text.
The text.
Gets the color.
The color.
Gets the brush.
The brush.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The contact.
The storage.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the index.
The index.
Gets the menu caption.
The menu caption.
Gets the text.
The text.
Gets the color.
The color.
Gets the brush.
The brush.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The category.
The storage.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the index.
The index.
Gets the menu caption.
The menu caption.
Gets the text.
The text.
Gets the color.
The color.
Gets the brush.
The brush.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The resource.
The storage.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the index.
The index.
Gets the menu caption.
The menu caption.
Gets the text.
The text.
Gets the color.
The color.
Gets the brush.
The brush.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The status.
The storage.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the id.
The id.
Gets the index.
The index.
Gets the menu caption.
The menu caption.
Gets the type of the status.
The type of the status.
Gets the text.
The text.
Gets the color.
The color.
Gets the brush.
The brush.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The brush.
Gets the color of the back.
The color of the back.
Gets the color of the fore.
The color of the fore.
Gets the style.
The style.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
The rp.
The storage.
Gets the type_name.
The type_name.
Gets the parent appointment.
The parent appointment.
Gets the pattern start date.
The pattern start date.
Gets the pattern end date.
The pattern end date.
Gets the start time.
The start time.
Gets the end time.
The end time.
Gets the duration.
The duration.
Gets a value indicating whether [no end date].
true if [no end date]; otherwise, false.
Gets the type of the recurrence.
The type of the recurrence.
Gets the day of month.
The day of month.
Gets the day of week mask.
The day of week mask.
Gets the interval.
The interval.
Gets the month of year.
The month of year.
Gets the occurrences.
The occurrences.
Gets the description.
The description.
Gets the instance.
The instance.
Allows binding to DataSource and mapping DataSource's fields to Appointment's properties.
IWebScheduleDesignSupport.
Gets the parent schedule.
C1WebScheduleStorage constructor.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Returns parent C1WebSchedule.
Gets WebAppointmentStorageMappings object.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a AppointmentCollection object that contains appointment related information.
ViewState
WebAppointmentStorageMappings class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Gets WebMappingInfo object for Id Mapping.
Index Mapping.
Location Mapping.
Start Mapping.
End Mapping.
Subject Mapping.
Body Mapping.
AppointmentProperties Mapping.
WebCategoryStorage class.
Call this method each time after changing your data source
if it doesn't implement interface.
Or use BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Add
and BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Remove
instead of corresponding methods of your data source class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Returns parent C1WebSchedule.
Mappings.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a CategoryCollection object that contains Category related information.
ViewState
WebCategoryStorageMappings class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Index Mapping.
Caption Mapping.
Id Mapping.
TextMapping Mapping.
WebContactStorage class.
ToString
Returns parent C1WebSchedule.
Call this method each time after changing your data source
if it doesn't implement interface.
Or use BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Add
and BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Remove
instead of corresponding methods of your data source class.
Mappings.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a ContactCollection object that contains Contacts related information.
ViewState
WebContactStorageMappings class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Index Mapping.
Caption Mapping.
Color Mapping.
Id Mapping.
TextMapping Mapping.
WebLabelStorage class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Returns parent C1WebSchedule.
Mappings.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a LabelCollection object that contains Labels related information.
ViewState
Mappings for WebLabelStorage.
WebLabelStorageMappings constructor.
ToString
Index Mapping.
Caption Mapping.
Color Mapping.
Id Mapping.
Text Mapping.
WebMappingInfo class.
WebMappingInfo constructor.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Name of data field or property to be bound to this object.
Name of the property which should be mapped. (readonly)
Gets the value determining the name of the data field
or property to be bound to this object. (readonly)
Gets the value indicating if this objects is mapped
to the data field or property. (readonly)
Gets the value indicating if mapping for this property is required or optional.(readonly)
WebResourceStorage class.
Returns a System.String that represents the current object.
Returns parent C1WebSchedule.
Call this method each time after changing your data source
if it doesn't implement interface.
Or use BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Add
and BaseStorage{T, TMappingCollection}.Remove
instead of corresponding methods of your data source class.
Mappings.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a ResourceCollection object that contains Resources related information.
ViewState
WebResourceStorageMappings class.
Initializes a new instance of the object.
ToString
Index Mapping.
Caption Mapping.
Color Mapping.
Id Mapping.
TextMapping Mapping.
WebStatus Storage.
WebStatusStorage constructor.
ToString
Returns parent C1WebSchedule control.
Mappings.
Data source ID.
Data member.
Gets a StatusCollection object that contains Statuses related information.
ViewState
Mappings for WebStatusStorage.
WebStatusStorageMappings constructor.
ToString
Index Mapping.
Caption Mapping.
Color Mapping.
Id Mapping.
TextMapping Mapping.
This class preliminary used by control developers.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Name of the command.
The arguments.
The control.
Excute ajax command.
GetEditorDialogsContent
Template Name
Template content string.
Returns root path of the current site.
GetResourceTextContent
Template Name
assembly contains the template.
Resolves the localization strings.
Content of the user control.
The c1 schedule.
Resolves the assembly names.
Content of the user control.
SchedulePropsMatchEvaluator.
The match.
Cancelable Appointment event arguments.
Event arguments object that provides the ability to cancel the event.
CancelableEventArgs constructor.
Set this property to true if you want to cancel action that called this event.
CancelableAppointmentEventArgs constructor.
The Appointment object associated with the event.
Cancelable BeforeViewChange event arguments.
CancelableBeforeViewChangeEventArgs constructor.
The type of the new view.
ClientSideEventArgumentsAttribute
Constructor
Event Arguments
Provides a unified way of converting string to System.Web.UI.WebControls.BorderStyle type
Can Convert convert from type.
Convert string to BorderStyle.
Provides a unified way of converting string to ViewType type
Can convert convert from type.
Convert string to ViewType type.
Provides a unified way of converting string to RecurrenceTypeEnum type
Can Convert convert from type.
Convert string to RecurrenceTypeEnum.
TimeScaleEnum Converter.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
Can Convert convert from type.
Converts the specified value object to an enumeration object.
An that provides a format context.
An optional . If not supplied, the current culture is assumed.
The to convert.
An that represents the converted .
is not a valid value for the target type.
The conversion cannot be performed.
Can Convert convert to type.
Converts the given value object to the specified destination type.
An that provides a format context.
An optional . If not supplied, the current culture is assumed.
The to convert.
The to convert the value to.
An that represents the converted .
is null.
is not a valid value for the enumeration.
The conversion cannot be performed.
Provides a unified way of converting string to WeekDaysEnum type
Can convert convert from type.
Convert string to WeekDaysEnum type.
Convert WeekDaysEnum type to string.
Provides a unified way of converting string to WeekOfMonthEnum type
Can Convert convert from type.
Convert string to WeekOfMonthEnum.
Provides a unified way of converting string to WeekViewStyleEnum type
Can convert convert from type.
Convert string to WeekViewStyleEnum type.
CustomClientCall event arguments.
CustomClientCall event arguments.
The neme of the command that will be executed
The neme of the command that will be executed.
Delegate for BeforeAppointmentCreate Event.
Sender object.
CancelableAppointmentEventArgs object.
Delegate for BeforeAppointmentDelete Event.
Sender object.
CancelableAppointmentEventArgs object.
Delegate for BeforeAppointmentUpdate Event.
Sender object.
CancelableAppointmentEventArgs object.
Delegate for BeforeViewChange Event.
Sender object.
CancelableBeforeViewChangeEventArgs object.
Delegate for CustomClientCall Event.
Sender object.
CustomClientCallEventArgs object.
GetClientResourceFullName
Find full path to resource by short name
Get Resource Text value
Full path to resource in assembly
Determines the default week view layout, either Horiontal or Vertical.
No default value. Both options will be available in the view selection bar.
Week view will be always represented using the horizontal layout.
Week view will be always represented using the vertical layout.
Represents the way to show or hide the work week view option in the view selection bar.
Work week will not be displayed in the view selection bar.
Work week option will be displayed as a button.
Work week option will be displayed as a radio button.
Determines the type of view to display in the C1Schedule control.
Day view.
Work week view.
Full week view with days displayed as work week view.
Full week view with days displayed as month view.
Month view.
Determines the type of week view to display in the C1Schedule control.
Office 2003 week view.
Office 2007 week view (7 full days as in Day View).
Determines the set of edit options available to the end-user.
None of edit options are available to the end-user.
Allows resizing operations for an appointment.
Allows dragging operations for an appointment.
Allows editing of an appointment by an end-user.
Allows creating of new appointments by an end-user.
Allows deleting of an appointment by an end-user.
Allows all edit operations. It is the default value.
Determines where NavigationBar will place navigation buttons.
Both buttons will be at left of the title text.
Both buttons will be at right of the title text.
Buttons will be at left and at right of the title text.
Render for .
Initializes a new instance of the class.
A control.
Initializes a new instance of the class.
A control.
The writer.
Renders the horizontal view week.
Used to search all day appointments that not marked by AllDay property.
The appointment.
Renders the appointment. Used bby day and WorkWeekView
The writer.
The appointment.
if set to true appointment can be resized.
The visualizer start.
The visualizer duration minutes.
The column view end.
Gets the view selection bar height in px (DayWeekMonthBar for all views).
Gets the navigation bar height in px (for all views).
Gets the days header height in px (DaysHeader for DayView, WorkWeekView and Vertical WeekView).
Gets the month header day names height in px (MonthHeaderDayNames_Row for MonthView).
Gets the status bar height in px (StatusBar for all views).
Gets the data table height in px.
Gets the control height in px.
Client side cultrue info class
name.
dateTimeFormat.
numberFormat.
ClientCultureInfo
Culture needed to be serialized.
Serialize cultrue info to string.
C1DescriptionAttribute replaces the DescriptionAttribute
and uses the C1Localizer class to return the localized Attribute string
Initialize C1DescriptionAttribute.
Key
Initialize C1DescriptionAttribute.
Key
Default value
Contains a single static method called InitTables that populates the
tables used by the C1Localizer class.
** This file is project-specific **
Do not include it in your project. Instead, copy it into your project
and customize the copy with the strings you need.